Guimn_e-surpass Hit 7070 3.2

s

Operation

SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2006 Issued by Communications Group Hofmannstraße 51 D-81359 München Technical modifications possible. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 i

1.1 Abbreviations ......................................................................................1

2 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 13

2.1 Using this Help System.....................................................................13 2.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features ..........................................................14 2.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software ................................................15

3 General 17

3.1 Date / Time Configuration .................................................................17 3.2 Network Element Configuration ........................................................18 3.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack...................................................20 3.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack ....................................................24 3.5 Option Settings .................................................................................28 3.6 EOW Configurations .........................................................................30 3.7 Neighbour Ports ................................................................................31 3.8 Script Configuration ..........................................................................32

4 Extension Shelf 37

4.1 Extension Shelf Configuration ..........................................................37 4.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration .......................................................38

5 Subrack Equipping 39

5.1 Possible Equipping Information ........................................................39 5.2 Actual Equipping Information............................................................40 5.3 Card Inventory Summary..................................................................41 5.4 Protection Shelf Number Config .......................................................42

6 Card Label Information 43

6.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information.........................43 6.2 PDH Cards Label Information...........................................................44 6.3 IFO155M-E Card Label Information..................................................45 6.4 SCOH Card Label Information..........................................................46 6.5 IF2M Card Label Information ............................................................47 6.6 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information .................................................48 6.7 Booster Cards Label Information ......................................................49

7 Card Configuration 51

7.1 Card Equipment Configuration .........................................................51 7.2 SCOH Card Configuration ................................................................52 7.3 CLU Card Configuration....................................................................53 7.4 SF160G Card Configuration .............................................................54 7.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration...............................................55 7.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack......................57 7.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration ...................................................58 7.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards ...................................................60 7.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration........................................................61 7.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards....................................................62 7.11 IFSO* Cards Configuration ...............................................................64 7.12 Port Provisioning Configuration ........................................................65 7.13 IF2M - Port Provisioning Config........................................................66

8 Timing 69

8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration ..................................69 8.2 T0 Configuration ...............................................................................72 8.3 T1 Configuration ...............................................................................73 8.4 T3 Configuration ...............................................................................75 8.5 T4 Configuration ...............................................................................77

9 Alarms 79

9.1 Alarm List ..........................................................................................79

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2

ii A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

9.2 NEAP Configuration..........................................................................83 9.3 Equipment Alarms.............................................................................84 9.4 Communication Alarms.....................................................................86 9.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table ...............................................88 9.6 E3/VC3 Alarms .................................................................................93 9.7 1:N MSP Alarms ...............................................................................95 9.8 TIF Configuration ..............................................................................97 9.9 TCA List ............................................................................................98

10 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows 101 10.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow..........................................................................101 10.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection .............................................................102 10.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow..........................................................................103 10.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ...........................................................104 10.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow........................................................................105 10.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection ...........................................................106 10.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow........................................................................107 10.8 ETH Traffic Flow .............................................................................108 10.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ....................................................................109 10.10 VC4 Configuration ......................................................................110 10.11 VC4 Selection .............................................................................113 10.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow................................................114

11 Protection Traffic Flow 115 11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow .....................................................115 11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow .................................................116 11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.................................................117 11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.................................................118 11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow..........................................................119 11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow..........................................................120 11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................121 11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................122 11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow...........................................................123 11.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................124 11.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ....................................................125 11.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ....................................................126 11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................127 11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow .....................................128 11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow..................129 11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................130 11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow .....................................131 11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow..................132 11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow .............................................................133

12 Protection Selection Windows 135

12.1 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards ......................................135

13 Traffic Configuration 137 13.1 Port Configuration ...........................................................................137 13.2 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards...............................................139 13.3 STM-N Configuration ......................................................................142 13.4 AU4/VC4 Configuration...................................................................146 13.5 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP ........................................................148 13.6 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP.........................................................150 13.7 ETH Configuration ..........................................................................153 13.8 E12 Configuration ...........................................................................156 13.9 E3 Configuration .............................................................................158 13.10 IFSOA – Config ..........................................................................159


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 iii

14 Multiplex Structure 161

14.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure ..................................................................161

15 Cross Connections 163 15.1 Cross Connections List ...................................................................163 15.2 Plain Cross Connections List ..........................................................166 15.3 Add Cross Connection ....................................................................168 15.4 Cross Connection Details ...............................................................170 15.5 Cross Connections Graphic ............................................................171 15.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details..................................................173 15.7 Modify Cross Connection................................................................174 15.8 Overhead Cross Connections.........................................................175

16 Protection Management 179 16.1 Protection Management..................................................................179

17 1 plus 1 MSP Protection 181

17.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration ......................................................181

18 1 to 1 MSP Protection 183

18.1 1:1 MSP Configuration....................................................................183

19 1 to N MSP Protection 185 19.1 1:N MSP Configuration ...................................................................185 19.2 Add 1:N MSP ..................................................................................188 19.3 1:N MSP Extension.........................................................................189 19.4 Add Working Ports ..........................................................................190 19.5 Working STM-1 Selection ...............................................................191 19.6 Working VC4 Selection ...................................................................192

20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection 193

20.1 2F SPRING Configuration...............................................................193 20.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration.....................................................196 20.3 4F SPRING Configuration...............................................................199 20.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration .......................................202 20.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration .........................................204 20.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING ......................205 20.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING......................................206 20.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ............................207 20.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING......................................208 20.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING..................209 20.11 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING..................................210 20.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ........................211 20.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING..................................212 20.14 <2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config .................................213 20.15 4F-Spring X Config .....................................................................214

21 Link Protection 217

21.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow............................................217 21.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration.........................................218 21.3 Add Extension Link Protection........................................................219 21.4 ISTM 4 Configuration ......................................................................221 21.5 ESM ISTM 4 Configuration .............................................................222

22 Concatenations 223

22.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection.....................................................223 22.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection .................................................................224 22.3 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection .................................................................225 22.4 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection .................................................................226


iv A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

22.5 Virtual 16x VC4 Selection ...............................................................227 22.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection .......................................................228 22.7 Concatenated VC4 Configuration ...................................................229 22.8 VC12-2v Configuration....................................................................232 22.9 VC3-2v Configuration......................................................................233 22.10 Concatenation Configuration ......................................................234 22.11 Concatenation Details ................................................................237 22.12 Add Concatenation Group ..........................................................238 22.13 Concatenation Group Templates................................................239 22.14 Modify Template .........................................................................240 22.15 VCLO-Concatenation Configuration...........................................241

23 VLAN 243

23.1 VLAN Functionality .........................................................................243 23.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow .......................................................................246 23.3 VLAN Selection...............................................................................248 23.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment.....................................................249 23.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment ........................................................252 23.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information .....................................................255 23.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment...............................................................256

24 Virtual VCs 257

24.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .........................................................257 24.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration .............................................................258 24.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration ...............................................................261 24.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration .......................................................264

25 GFP Configurations 267

25.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow..................................................................267 25.2 GFP Group Subview .......................................................................269 25.3 GFP Assignment.............................................................................270 25.4 PF2G5 GFP Assignment ................................................................272 25.5 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration............................274 25.6 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration ............................276 25.7 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration ............................277 25.8 PF2G5 Add CUG ............................................................................278 25.9 SDH GFP Assignment ....................................................................280

26 LCAS 283 26.1 LCAS State Configuration...............................................................283 26.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group................................................285 26.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration ...........................................................286 26.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration .........................................................287 26.5 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection ..............................................288 26.6 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection ..........................................289 26.7 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration.....................................................290 26.8 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration...................................................293

27 MCF General 297

27.1 Message Communication Functions...............................................297 27.2 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration ............................................298 27.3 MCF Transport Connection Information .........................................300 27.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance.......................................302

28 MCF CLNS 303

28.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information ......................................303 28.2 MCF CLNS Performance................................................................305

29 MCF DCC 309

29.1 MCF DCC Configuration .................................................................309


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 v

29.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ...................................................311 29.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance ....................................................313 29.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address ................................................315 29.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address ............................................317 29.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections ..................318

30 MCF Ethernet 319

30.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration .............................................319 30.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ..............................................321 30.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address...........................................323 30.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address ......................................325

31 MCF OSI/IP 327

31.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration ......................................................327 31.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration ......................................................328 31.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance.......................................................330 31.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address............................332 31.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address .......................334

32 IP Settings 335

32.1 IP Addresses Configuration ............................................................335 32.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify..............................................................338 32.3 IP Static Routing Configuration.......................................................339 32.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add ............................................................341 32.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify ........................................................342

33 OSPF Settings 343

33.1 OSPF Configuration........................................................................343 33.2 OSPF Areas Configuration .............................................................345 33.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify...............................................................347 33.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration ....................................................348 33.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration............................................349 33.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add .................................................351 33.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration.......................................................352 33.8 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add.............................................................354 33.9 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration..............................................356 33.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration .......................................357 33.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add.............................................359 33.12 OSPF Neighbours Information ...................................................360 33.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information ........................................362 33.14 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details......................................364 33.15 OSPF LSDB Information ............................................................365 33.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details ..........................................................367 33.17 OSPF External LSDB Information ..............................................368 33.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details............................................370

34 TCP Settings 371 34.1 TCP Connections Information.........................................................371 34.2 TCP Connections Entry Details ......................................................373

35 Data 375 35.1 Subrack Data ..................................................................................375 35.2 ASIC Data Information ....................................................................376 35.3 Copy Data .......................................................................................377 35.4 Copy Card Data ..............................................................................379 35.5 DB Management Configuration ......................................................380 35.6 DB Download Dialog.......................................................................382 35.7 DB Upload Dialog ...........................................................................383 35.8 NE Logs Information .......................................................................384 35.9 Log Records Attribute .....................................................................385


vi A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

35.10 Copy to Permanent MACs..........................................................386

36 Performance 387

36.1 Ethernet Packet Performance.........................................................387 36.2 AU4 PJE Performance....................................................................390 36.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance..........................................................392 36.4 MSTTP Near End Performance......................................................395 36.5 MSTTP Far End Performance ........................................................399 36.6 RSTTP Near End Performance ......................................................403 36.7 VCCTP Near End Performance......................................................407 36.8 VCCTP Far End Performance ........................................................411 36.9 VCTTP Near End Performance ......................................................415 36.10 VCTTP Far End Performance ....................................................419 36.11 VC12 Near End Performance.....................................................423 36.12 VC12 Far End Performance .......................................................427 36.13 GFP Frames Performance .........................................................431

37 IF7FE2GEL2 card 433 37.1 IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config ........................................................433 37.2 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry add........................................................453 37.3 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify ...................................................455 37.4 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add .........................................457 37.5 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify .....................................458 37.6 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config .............................................460 37.7 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add ........................................463 37.8 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify....................................464 37.9 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config ...........................................465 37.10 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add .................................468 37.11 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify .............................469 37.12 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config ..........................................................470 37.13 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config ...................................472 37.14 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information ..................................486 37.15 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration..............................................489 37.16 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add ...................................................491 37.17 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify ...............................................492 37.18 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information..................................493 37.19 IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config ......................................................495 37.20 IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config...............................497 37.21 IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info .............................................................498 37.22 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config ..............................................502 37.23 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details ....................................504 37.24 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify ....................................507 37.25 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info ...................................510 37.26 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug ....................................512 37.27 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config.......................................................515 37.28 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add ..............................516 37.29 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify.............................................518 37.30 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details ............................................520 37.31 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info ...........................................521 37.32 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info .......................................522 37.33 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details ..................................524 37.34 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config ........................................526 37.35 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add...................................528 37.36 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info ...........................529 37.37 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details ..................................532

38 RPR 535

38.1 RPR Switch Configuration ..............................................................535 38.2 RPR Ring Performance ..................................................................538 38.3 RPR Feeder Performance ..............................................................541


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 vii

38.4 Adding a Permanent Entry..............................................................544

39 Security 545

39.1 Access Information .........................................................................545 39.2 NMS NE Password .........................................................................546 39.3 Change Password to Default ..........................................................547

40 Software 549

40.1 Software Management....................................................................549 40.2 Software Download.........................................................................551 40.3 Delta Software Download ...............................................................552 40.4 Active APS Record .........................................................................553 40.5 APS Compatibility Information ........................................................554

41 Fault Clearance 555

41.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance.................................555 41.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance ..........................................557 41.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance .......................................561 41.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance ...............................................566 41.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance ...........................................569 41.6 TIF Fault Clearance ........................................................................572 41.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance ................................................................573

42 How to... (General Tasks) 575

42.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings ...................................................575 42.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping.......................................576 42.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards ......................................577 42.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports ..........................................578 42.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object 579 42.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object ...............580 42.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging................................581

43 How to... (Timing) 583

43.1 How to Configure the Timing ..........................................................583 43.2 How to Set Sync Priorities ..............................................................585

44 How to... (Alarms) 587

44.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling ................................587 44.2 How to Suppress Alarms ................................................................588 44.3 How to Configure TIF Ports ............................................................589

45 How to... (Cross Connections) 591 45.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options ....................591 45.2 How to Create a Cross Connection ................................................592 45.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection...................593 45.4 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection.....................594 45.5 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection.....................595 45.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection ...........596 45.7 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR 597 45.8 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection.............................598 45.9 How to Add and Remove Path Protections ....................................599 45.10 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection ............................600 45.11 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection...........................601 45.12 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ...........602 45.13 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection..................603 45.14 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection.....................................604 45.15 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections ...............................605


viii A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

46 How to... (OH Cross Connections) 607

46.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options..............607 46.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection........................................608 46.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection.................................609

47 How to... (Protections) 611

47.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection .......................611 47.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection..........................612 47.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection..........................613 47.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings................614 47.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection ...........................615 47.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection .......................617 47.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection 618 47.8 How to Configure RPR Protection ..................................................619 47.9 How to Create an SNCP Protection................................................620 47.10 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path...........621 47.11 How to Set Up the Squelching Table .........................................623 47.12 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link ...............................625

48 How to... (Concatenations) 627 48.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations .........................................627 48.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations..........................................628

49 How to... (GFP Configurations) 629

49.1 How to Create / Delete VC Channels .............................................629 49.2 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups....................................630 49.3 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel .........................631 49.4 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG..........................................632 49.5 How to Specify the CUG Service Class..........................................634 49.6 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic ........635 49.7 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths................................................636

50 How to... (Data and Software Handling) 637 50.1 How to Download VCDB Files ........................................................637 50.2 How to Upload VCDB Files.............................................................638

51 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) 639 51.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH ...................................639 51.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH.................................................640 51.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC.....643 51.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH.................646 51.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB..............................................................649 51.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend.............................................................650

52 Index 651


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 1

1.1 Abbreviations

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AFI Authority and Format Identifier

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

AK TPDU Acknowledge Transport Protocol Data Unit

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

APD Avalanche Photo Diode

APS Automatic Protection Switching / Application Program Switching

AS Alarm Suppression

ASBR Autonomous System Border Router

ASCII American Standard for Information Interchange

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notification One (ITU X.208)

ASW Application SoftWare

AU Administrative Unit

AU4 Administrative Unit for VC-4

AUI Attachment Unit Interface

AUX Auxiliary channel

BASW BAsic SoftWare

BBE Background Block Error

BDM Background Debug Mode interface

BER Bit Error Ratio

CC Cross Connect / Cross Connection

CD Collision Detection

CE Communauté Européenne

CF Card Failure

CFG Configuration

CH Channel

CL Configuration Log

CLNS ConnectionLess Network layer Service


2 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

CLR Clear

CLU Central Clock Unit

CP Connection Protection

CPL Current Problem List

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRS Card Release State

CS4 Connection Switch 4xSTM-1

CSO Card Switch Off

CT Card Type

CTP Connection Termination Point

CUG Closed User Group

DB Data Base

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCCB Data Communication Channel Bus

DCCM DCC bytes D4 to D12 (Multiplex section)

DCCR DCC bytes D1 to D3 (Regenerator section)

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DEC Decimal

DEMUX Demultiplexer

DL Data Link

DNU Do Not Use

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

DSP Domain Specific Part

E4 Electrical interface signal

EBC Error Block Count

ECC Embedded Communication Channel


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 3

ECCM ECC for Multiplex section

ECCR ECC for Regeneration section

EDI Equipment Defect Indication / Electronic Data Interchange

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EM Element Manager

EOW Engineering Order Wire

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EPS Equipment Protection Switch

ES Electrical Section / Errored Second(s)

ESD ElectroStatic Discharge

ESM-Core Provides optical 622 Mbit/s link to main shelf

ETS European Telecommunication Standard

ETH Ethernet

ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute

EXC Excessive bit error rate

F Standardized interface for connection of the operating terminal

FAA Fan Alarm Adapter

FAS Frame Alignment Signal

FC/PC Connector type

FE Far End

FEBE Far End Block Error

FEC Forward Error Correction

FEPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

FERF Far End Receive Failure

FG Functional Group

FIFO First In First Out

FM Fault Management

FO Fiber Optic

FOD Fiber Optic Distributor

FOP Failure of (MSP) Protocol


4 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

FOT Fail of Topology

FTA File Transfer Area

FTP File Transfer Protocol

FU Functional Unit

FW Firmware

GDMO Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (ITU X.722)

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GMT Greenwich Mean Time

GTP Group Termination Point

GUI Graphical User Interface

HW HardWare

HEL Historical Event Log

HEX Hexadecimal

HO Higher Order

ICB Internal Control Bus

ICS Internal Communication System

ICU Internal Control Unit

ID Identification

IDI Initial Domain Identifier

IDP Initial Domain Part

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IF Interface

IF2M Electrical E1 interface card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s

IF345M PDH Interface 34/45 Mbit/s

IFO155M Optical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFO155M-E Electrical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFOFE Optical Octuple Fast Ethernet card

IFOFE-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-4 or VC-3


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 5

IFOFES-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-3 or VC12

IFQ2G5, IFQ2G5B Optical STM-16 card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP

IFQ622M Optical STM-4 card, Quad 622 Mbit/s, SFP

IFQGBE Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card

IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card

IFQGBEB Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator functionality

IFQGBEB-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator functionality

IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card

IFS10G, IFS10GB Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s

IFS10G-M Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Metro WDM

IFS10G-R Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Regio WDM

IFS10G-WLS Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for WLS WDM purposes

IFS2G5 Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s

IFS2G5B Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP

IFS40G-MX Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s

IFSOA Interface Single Optical Amplifier

IFSOA-PDC Interface Single Optical Amplifier-PDC

IFSOB Interface Single Optical Booster

IFSOB-PDC Interface Single Optical Booster-PDC

IMN Installation Manual

IMTS Internal Multiplex Timing Source

INT Internal Supervision

I/O Input/Output

IP Internet Protocol

IS Intermediate System

ISDH Internal SDH Signal

ISF ISDH Signal Fail

ISO International Standards Organization

ISTM Internal Synchronous Transport Module

ISU ISDH Switch Layer Unit


6 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

ITMN Installation and Test Manual

ITU International Telecommunication Union

K1, K2 Automatic Protection Switching

KBUS K-byte BUS for MSP Control

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on D Channel

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LED Light Emitting Diode

LNQ622M PDH Extension Link Card

LO Lower Order

LO SF Lower Order Switching Fabric

LOF Loss of Frame

LOL Loss of Lock

LOM Loss of Marker

LOP Loss of Pointer

LOS Loss of Signal

LSDB Link State Data Base

LSU Line Switching Unit

LT Line Termination

LT0 Loss of T0 clock

LTI Loss of Timing Source Incoming (T1, T3)

LTS Loss of Timing Source

MAC Media Access Control

MACAT Media Access Control Address Table

MCF Message Communication Functions

MDI Multiple Document Interface

MIB Management Information Base


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 7

MIBS Management Information Base of Synchronous Multiplexer

MIS-PT Mismatch Path Trace

MIS-RT Mismatch Regenerator Trace

MMC Multimedia Card

MMI Man Machine Interface

MS Multiplex Section

MSAIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication

MSFERF Multiplex Section Far End Receive Failure

MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MSPCO Multiplexer Section Path Connection

MSPTF Multiplexer Section Protection Function

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTS Multiplexer Timing Source

MTTR Mean Time to Repair

NC/P Network Connection Protection

NCT Network Craft Terminal

NE Network Element

NEC Network Element Controller

NEAP Network Element Alarm Panel

NMS Network Management System

NPDU Network Protocol Data Unit

NRZ Non Return to Zero

NRZI Non Return to Zero Invert

NSAP Network Service Access Point

OAS Optical Amplifier Section

OGL Operator Guidelines

OH Overhead

OHCC Overhead Cross Connections


8 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

OHF Overhead Functions

OH-IF Overhead Interface

OGL Operator Guidelines

OOF Out of Frame

OS Optical Section

OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio

OSPF Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)

P4 Plesiochronous Digital Signal

P Protection

PCS Plesiochronous Connection Supervision

PCU Peripheral Control Unit

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PET Possible Equipping Table

PF2G5 Packet Switch Fabric Card

PJE Pointer Justification Event

PLL Phase Locked Loop

PLM Payload Mismatch

PLP Packet Level Protection

PM Performance Management or Performance Monitoring

POH Path Overhead

POM Path Overhead Monitoring

PP Path Protection

PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence

PRC Primary Reference Clock

PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory

PSE Path Switching Event

PSU Power Supply Unit

PTI Path Trace Identifier


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 9

Q Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

Q-B3 Q-Interface to Operations System via Ethernet-LAN

QECC Q-Interface via DCC

Q-F Standardized Interface for Connection of the Operating Terminal

QOS Quality of Service

QST-B3 QD2-Interface to LCT

Qx Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

RAM Random Access Memory

RAP Reachable Address Prefix

RD Read

RDI Remote Defect Indication

REI Remote Error Indication

RFI Remote Failure Indication

RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer

RL Remote Loop

RLC Remote Loop Control

ROM Read-Only Memory

RPR Resilient Packet Ring

RS Regenerator Section

RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead

RTC Real Time Clock

RTI Regenerator Trace Identifier

Rx Receiver

SC Connector Type

SCOH Central Controller Card

SD Signal Degraded

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDI Service and Diagnostic Interface

SEC Synchronous Equipment Clock


10 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function

SES Severely Errored Second(s)

SET2 Synchronous Equipment Timing

SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator

SETS Functional Group "Synchronous Equipment Timing Source"

SF Signal Fail

SF160G Central VC-4 Switch Card

SF2G5 Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SF10G Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SFP Small Form factor Pluggable (pluggable optical module)

SNCP/I Sub-Network Connection Protection / Inherent Monitoring

SNCP/N Sub-Network Connection Protection / Non-intrusive Monitoring

SNPA Sub-Network Point of Attachment

SOH Section Overhead

SPO Spontaneous Alarm

SQM Sequence Mismatch

SSF Server Signal Fail

SSM Synchronization Status Message

SSU Synchronzation Supply Unit

STM-N Synchronous Transport Module Level N

SUG Supervisory Unequipped Generation

SUM Supervisory Unequipped Monitoring

SW Software

T0 System Clock

T1 Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal

T3 Input for External Clock Reference Signal

T4 Output for Clock Reference Signal

TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCP Termination Connection Point

TxDeg Transmit Degraded


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 11

TED Technical Description

TxFail Transmission Fail

TIF Telemetry Interface

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TMP Timestamp

TNMS Telecommunication Network Management System

TTI Trail Trace Identifier

TTP Trail Termination Point

TP Termination Point

TPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit

TSD Trail Signal Degrade

TSF Trail Signal Fail

TU Tributary Unit

TUG Tributary Unit Group

Tx Transmitter

TXDeg Transmit Degrade Signal

TXFAIL Transmit Failure

UAS Unavailable Second(s)

UAT Unavailable Time

UMN User Manual

UNEQ Unequipped

USI User Interface

UTIF Universal Transmission Internal Interface

VC Virtual Container

VC-n Virtual Container Level n

VCDB Variable Configuration Data Block

VCnTTP VCn Trail Termination Point

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network


12 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WLS WDM Longspan System

WR Write

WTR Wait to Restore time


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 13

2 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070

2.1 Using this Help System

This help system provides information on the windows and menus of the SURPASS hiT 7070, repair actions after alarm messages, and selected task instructions ("How to ...").

Displaying help topics

In the Help menu, click Help Topics...

The SURPASS hiT 7070 Help window is displayed, giving you access to the table of contents, an index, and a full-text search function.

Displaying the help of the currently open window

Press the F1 key

or

Click the question mark button in the toolbar

or

in the Help menu, click On Window... F1.

Displaying information on the software

In the Help menu, click About...

Printing help windows

To start the printout click the print button in the toolbar.

In case of technical problems with the printout, print the identical help page out of the GUIMN manual.

Notes

Standard MS Windows functions and buttons are not described in this online help.

If there is a path stated at the top of the help window specifying how to find the corresponding SURPASS hiT 7070 window, that path should only be seen as an example. In many cases, there are also other ways to open the same SURPASS hiT 7070 window.


14 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

2.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features

The SURPASS hiT 7070 is a comprehensive multi-service SDH multiplexer and cross-connect for universal use. The SURPASS hiT 7070 is configurable as

• TMX (terminal multiplexer),

• ADM (add/drop multiplexer), or

• small LXC (local cross-connect).

in multi-service access and edge network applications.

The network elements can be used in a straightforward way of creating point-to-point connections, linear chain configurations and ring configurations.

According to requirements, equipping for the following application scenarios is possible:

• Terminal-to-terminal topologies,

• Linear topologies with add/drop functions (chains),

• Feeder network functionalities.

The SURPASS hiT 7070 offers not only standard functions, but also a lot of additional sophisticated functions for fast and complex traffic transfer and enhanced protection features, such as:

• Ethernet access with 10BaseT, 100BaseTX, and 1000T interfaces,

• Interfaces for SDH traffic signals up to STM-64,

• Virtual concatenation,

• Contiguous concatenation,

• Single fiber operation with optical splitter,

• 2-fiber ring protection,

• 4-fiber ring protection,

• RPR functionalities,

• Closed User Groups (CUG),

• EOW functions,

• Support of VLAN,

• Support of logical ports,

• IP / OSI tunneling,

• etc.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 15

2.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software

The complete Element Manager software (to be installed on the operating terminal) consists of the following components:

• Ethernet software as a software package of the used Ethernet hardware. (HW component with SW driver for the Ethernet card of the PC, Workstation, or Mainframe used. This driver is not part of the SURPASS hiT 7070 software pack-age.)

• The OSI Stack software consisting of LLC Driver and OSI Stack (Marben Stack) software,

• NE Proxy software,

• TNMS CT software,

• Java Virtual Machine software,

• SURPASS hiT 7070 software package (LCT or NCT).

[6243]


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 17

3 General

3.1 Date / Time Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> NE Time...

Opening this window causes a request apply of date and time of the NE. The received values are displayed in the Current NE Time field and are automatically updated each second, according to the internal clock source of the PC that is used as LCT/NCT.

Current NE Time

The current NE time can be changed by adjusting the PC-time in the system time setup of the MS Windows control panel.

Adjust NE Time to PC-GMT

The date and time values for the PC-GMT are given by the MS Windows system time settings. The date and time values are displayed in read only fields.


18 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

3.2 Network Element Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...

The window is used to allocate user defined location name and application type.

Value Ranges:

Name 48 Bytes

Location 64 Bytes

Type

Displays the NE type.

Startup Info

Displays information about the latest NE startup.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 19

NE Unique HW Code

Comprising the NE serial number and family code.

Application Type

An application type name can be inserted.

Second Power Supply Monitoring

If this checkbox is set, the Second Power Supply Monitoring is activated.

PSE Switch For Whole NE

If this checkbox is set, the path protection switching event notification is sent in case of an activated SNCP. Its configuration is valid for all protected cross connections of the NE.

Persistency Time

In this field, you can make the time settings for alarm self-recognition.

Raise Time [0..30 s]

This is the minimum time for which an alarm must be in the raised state in order to be reported securely. The default raise time is 2 s.

Clear Time [1..30 s]

Specifies how long the alarm must be in the cleared state before it is reported as cleared. The default clear time is 10 s.

Log Overwrite

Specifies if the Exception Log and/or the Trace Log will be overwritten in case of overflow.

Fault

Enable/Disable the following abnormal conditions (as communication alarms with severity "Warning"): enabled laser shutdown, enabled port loopbacks, deactivated ALS on optical interface cards, active operator commands for timing configurations (T0 configuration, T4 configuration), active operator commands within protection schemes (1+1 MSP, 1:1 MSP, 1:N MSP, 2FSPRING, 4FSPRING, Microshelf extension traffic protection, 1:N card protection of IF2M/IF345M/IFO155M-E, RPR bypass protection)


20 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

3.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.

The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window segment

Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 21

Top window segment

The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the possibly equipped cards.

The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.

If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure subrack-related settings: Subrack 1 is the double-core subrack, Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.

Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf Config window.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.


22 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 23

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment

The bottom window segment provides the port list.

It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected (clicked).

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

How to Configure the Equipping

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection


How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections


24 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

3.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack

This window is accessible via the toolbar button

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 25

The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window segment

Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.

Top window segment

The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the possibly equipped cards.

The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.

If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure subrack-related settings: Subrack 1 is the single-core subrack, Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.

Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf Config window.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.


26 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 27

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment

The bottom window segment provides the port list.

It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected (clicked).

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

How to Configure the Equipping

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection





28 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

3.5 Option Settings


In this window, you can preset the alarm severity threshold, the window that is opened at startup, the time zone frequency display, and several general options for your desktop.

Alarm Severity Threshold

Used to set the threshold for alarm display. Alarms with severities above and equal to the threshold are included in the alarm summary displayed in the cards. Alarms with severities below the configured threshold are excluded from the alarm summary displayed in the cards.

For example, if critical is selected, only critical alarms are indicated in the cards. If major is selected, critical and major alarms are displayed.

By default, the threshold warning is set which means that all alarms are included in the alarm summary.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 29

Save on Exit: Used to enable or disable the saving of the alarm severity threshold setting at application termination.

Open at Startup

Used to set the windows that open automatically at the next system startup.

Time Display

Used to set the time zone. Displayed or saved times are dependent on settings according to the system time zone of the operation system.

Frequency Display

Used to set the kind of display (frequency or wavelength or channel numbers) with optical interfaces.

General

Alarm Flash: Used to enable or disable flashing.

Maximum numbers of list entries can be selected.

Disable Apply Button during Outstanding Data can be selected.


30 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

3.6 EOW Configurations

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Overhead Functions...

Two Wire Handset:

Allows to select the telephone number of the NE.

Four Wire EM Interface:

Allows to connect to a EOW conference.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 31

3.7 Neighbour Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Neighbour Ports...

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.


32 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

3.8 Script Configuration

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> File -> Script Configuration...

This window allows to handle script configuration files, which can be used to configure the NE.

The script language gives access to all NE configurations except for MCF, overhead cross connections and SW management.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 33

Top Section

The displayed symbols correspond to the File and Script menus:

Symbol Corresponding Menu Item

Description

File -> New File Creates a new empty script configuration file.

File -> Open... Opens an existing script configuration file.

File -> Save As... Saves the script configuration file.

Script -> Execute Starts script configuration.

Script -> Stop Stops script configuration.

Script -> Record Automatically creates a script configuration file.

For automatic creating, click the Record symbol, perform NE configurations, then click the Stop symbol.

For manual creating, enter command lines according to the syntax described below.

Bottom Section

When the script configuration file is started, the bottom section shows parser errors. To get the line of the error in the script configuration file, click the error message.

Syntax

• A semicolon follows every statement.

• A statement can occupy more than one line in the script.

• The configuration script does not support variables. All parameters must be given explicitly either as numbers or as predefined symbols.


34 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

• The syntax is not case sensitive.

• Script statements: ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Action (Parameters); ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Set (Attribute, Parameters); // <Comment> or /* <comment> */

• An object instance is clearly identified by the following values: ObjectClass subrackNumber slotReference containerIndex objectIndex

The ObjectClass is always given as a symbolic keyword followed by the remaining 4 values enclosed in brackets.

Example: IFQ2G5(1, 306, 1, 1); refers to the IFQ2G5 card in slot # 306.

• A SET invoke operation on an attribute can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Set" is used in the statements to configure values of attributes. The syntax for performing a SET invoke is: objectInstance.Set (Attribute, Value).

Example: IFS2G5(1, 303).Set(EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStartup,enabled);

• An action can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Action" is used in the statements to perform action invokes. The syntax for performing an ACTION invoke is: objectInstance.Action (Parameters);

Example: EquipmentManager(1,211,1,1).ConfigureRequiredEquipping(((1, 306), CardEquipped((IFS10G,"MspProtection"))));

• The "Wait" command allows the user to specify a certain amount of time that the script configuration execution procedure must hold before executing the next command or commands. The syntax for the Wait command is: Wait(<time interval between 1 to 10000 seconds>);

Example: Wait(1000);

• The "Loop" command allows the user to specify blocks of instructions that must be repeated a certain number of times. It adds to the scripting functionality the support of execution cycles. The syntax for the Loop command is: Loop(<number of times to repeat the block between 1 to 10000 or * to repeat until a user stop>); <Qst command 1>; ... <Qst command n>; EndLoop;

Examples: Loop(50); ne(1,254,1,1,1).Set(powerSupplyDuplication,enabled); EndLoop; Loop(*);


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 35

faultManager(1,254,1,1,1).Set(f4nIntegrationTime,(secondValues(3),11)); EndLoop;

• Syntax for the complex QST types:

SEQUENCE (element 1, element 2, ... element n)

SEQUENCE OF BYTE (byte 1, byte 2, ... byte n) or (<text>)

Example for ACTION: ethernetLinkage(1,511).createReachableAddressEthernet(("SIEMENSAG"), 0x1, external, (0x11, 0x22,0x33,0x44,0x55,0x66), enabled);

SET OF (element 1, element 2, ..., element n)

CHOICE <choice tag>, <QST type associated with the given choice tag>

Example: vcCo().connect(unprotectedUni, (SF2G5(1,309,2,1),SF2G5(1,309,2,3)));


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 37

4 Extension Shelf

4.1 Extension Shelf Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...

This window allows to configure existing microshelves. The corresponding tab(s) will be added to the Module View.

The main shelf name (see table below) appears as Subrack 1.

Subrack ID Subrack Type

1 Main Shelf

2 Microshelf #1

3 Microshelf #2

4 Microshelf #3

5 Microshelf #4


38 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

4.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View of a microshelf (subrack 2 or higher), by using the context menu of an ESM-CORE card symbol -> Configuration...

Card State

Displays the card state.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.

Master System Microshelf

Displays if the microshelf is used as a master system.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 39

5 Subrack Equipping

5.1 Possible Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Information -> Possible Equipping...

This window displays the possible equipping of the NE. It gives information about the possible equipping of every slot with cards.


40 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

5.2 Actual Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Information -> Actual Equipping...

This window displays the actual equipping of the NE. It gives information about the equipping of the slots. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a list control to ensure that the desired information can be found efficiently.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 41

5.3 Card Inventory Summary

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Information -> Card Inventory Summary...

This window displays - in addition to NE name and location - detailed information about all configured cards: ordering / serial numbers and the used frequencies.


42 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

5.4 Protection Shelf Number Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a IFO155M-E card -> Configuration -> Card...

This window allows selecting the protection shelf number.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 43

6 Card Label Information

6.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SDH or Ethernet interface card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).


44 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

6.2 PDH Cards Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the context menu of a PDH card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 45

6.3 IFO155M-E Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFO155ME symbol -> Information -> Card Label...



46 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

6.4 SCOH Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Information -> Card Label...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 47

6.5 IF2M Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a microshelf, by using the context menu of an IF2M card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...



48 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

6.6 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFS40G-MX symbol -> Information -> Card Label...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 49

6.7 Booster Cards Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFSOB card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 51

7 Card Configuration

7.1 Card Equipment Configuration

This window is accessible via Module View, after right-clicking the slot number symbol and selecting a card that offers different provisioning modes.

This window allows you to set the provisioning mode (Empty, Empty-Auto, Working or protection if available).

If Empty-Auto is selected, it is not necessary to configure the traffic interface cards explicitly. When a traffic interface card is plugged in, the SURPASS hiT 7070 (in active NE state) will automatically detect its hardware type and add the card to the Required Equipping list.


52 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

7.2 SCOH Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label


Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.

EOW Active

Activates the Engineering Order Wire function.

Carries Overhead Connections

Displays the current connections.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 53

7.3 CLU Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a CLU symbol -> Configuration...

Card State


User Label




Actual Clock Master

Displays the actual clock master.


54 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

7.4 SF160G Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SF160G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State


User Label




Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.

Low order switching protection states

Displays the slot number of the working card and the selected switching fabric.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 55

7.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration

These windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 or SF10G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State


User Label




Current Selected Switching Fabric

Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.

Selected T0 Bus


Carries Traffic Connections


Carries Overhead Connections


Note:


56 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The maximum number of SF2G5 cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting cards.

The maximum number of SF10G cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting cards.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 57

7.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack

SF2G5 / SF10G - 2Mbit Connection - Slot 301

The LO switch fabric cards SF2G5 / SF10G must be inserted at slot 301 to allow cross connections to the 2-Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211)

In case the LO switch fabric card SF2G5 / SF10G is inserted at another traffic slot, VC12 cross connections are possible but no 2-Mbit/s port of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211) can be cross connected.

Workaround:

For connecting the 2 Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211), insert and configure the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G always at slot 301 of the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC subrack.

For cross connecting VC12 signals only, the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G can be inserted and configured at any other traffic slot.

SF10G - VC4 Connection - Slot 301

Limitation:

In case the LO switch card SF10G is used at Slot 301 the VC4 containers #49, #50, #51 and #52 are invisible.

Reason:

Those four VC4 containers are used for the fixed connection of 2-Mbit/s ports 1 - 252 (4 x 63 ports = 4x VC4) to the slot 301, so that the 2-Mbit/s cross connection can be done.

Workaround:

If all 64 VC4 containers will be needed the LO switch card SF10G has to be inserted at another traffic slot but not on slot 301.

SF2G5/SF10G - Card Protection - Slot 301/302

In case the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 shall be used as Card Protection (CP) it has to be configured during first commissioning. Changing the card type of the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 from "working" to "protection" is not possible if cross connections already exists.


58 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

7.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a microshelf, via the Module View, e.g. by using the context menu of a IF2M or IF345M symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State


Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label




Selected T0 Bus


Current Selected Low Order Switching Fabric



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 59

Monitored channel NE

One of the channels of the card can be switched to the monitor port (PDH-in and PDH-out simultaneously).

Monitored Channel Direction (for IF345M only)

PDH-in or PDH-out can be set.

Used in Protection

Indicates if the card is used in a protection.

AIS Insertion

Enables the AIS insertion to insert a manual AIS towards the port.


60 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

7.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SDH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State


User Label






Selected T0 Bus



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 61

7.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the IFS40G-MX symbol -> Configuration...

Card State


User Label


Connection 40G Reference:

Type of Connection Reference

Relates to the fiber interconnection between the IFS40G-MX and IFS10G type cards.

Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.

External: Interconnection to another NE.

Connection Reference

In case of Internal interconnection, the connected IFS10G type cards must be configured correctly.


62 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

7.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State


User Label






Selected T0 Bus


Carries Traffic Connections


VLAN Concentrator Functionality State:

VLAN cards can be configured in 3 different modes:

P2P – Point to Point mode


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 63

Card is working as standard gigabit traffic card like IFQGBE / -E without VLAN functionality. All 4 ETH ports are switched ON.

VLAN C – VLAN Concentrator mode

Card is working in pure VLAN mode with 2 concentrators. ETH port #1 = concentrator #1 ETH port #3 = concentrator #2 ETH port #2 and ETH port #4 are switched off in this mode

Mixed – Mixed mode

Card is working in a mixed mode with ETH port #1 and ETH port #2 running in P2P mode, without VLAN functionality. ETH port #3 is working as VLAN concentrator #2. ETH port #4 is switched off.

Note: A change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the card settings ( i.e. GFP/VLAN ID assignments, ...). Only the selected template does not have to be deleted.


64 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

7.11 IFSO* Cards Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFSOB symbol -> Configuration...

Card State


User Label





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 65

7.12 Port Provisioning Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.

In case of an optical interface card: Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.


66 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

7.13 IF2M - Port Provisioning Config

The window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 67

In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.

Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 69

8 Timing

8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> SEC...

In this window, you can configure timing sources that are used for synchronization. Each timing source besides internal timing can be configured according to priorities. Internal timing always has the lowest priority. The timing source, when available, with the highest priority is used for the timing derivation.

A green hook or red cross symbol next to the T0 Prio field indicates the lockout state. If a timing source is locked out (red cross), it is generally not available as a synchronization reference.


70 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

You can toggle the lockout state by clicking this lockout symbol separately for each T1 and T3 timing source.

Currently selected timing sources for the clock pulses T0 and T4 are displayed by means of an arrow. The arrow displays the mode as set in the T0 and T4 configuration windows. For further information, see below ("Forced").

The SA bit used for SSM evaluation / insertion is configurable independently for T3 and T4. The SA bit configuration is only effective with 2-Mbit/s mode operation.

Note:

T4 Clock (T4C): The T4C output transmits a 2048 kHz signal and is squelched in case of:

• Reference source is not available in fource mode

• None of the configured reference sources is available in automatic or manual mode

• Manually by the operator command "OFF"

• In the mode "forced T0" if T0 is in holdover or free running mode

• QL enabled (use SSM for selection) and the quality of the reference clock is lower than the configured threshold; selectable thresholds are: 2-PRC, 4-SSU_T, 8-SSu_L, 11-SEC, 0-off

T4 Data (T4D): The T4D output transmits a 2048 kbit/s signal (CRC4) and will be squelched in the same cases as T4C too. For the squelch state, the clock will be diverted from T0, and "DNU" will be inserted into the SA-bit (SA=FFh).

The modes involved are as follows:

Auto: The system selects from the configured timing sources, according to the assigned priority, the best clock pulse. For the same quality, the value of the set priority is decisive (1 = very good/6 = very bad/do not use).

Forced: You can determine which timing source is used. If the selected timing source fails, a second arrow displays Selected in the Holdover field. The Forced arrow remains on the selected timing source. If the timing source can be used again, the second arrow disappears after expiry of the Wait to Restore Time. Here assigned priorities have no meaning. The jump from higher timing quality to lower timing quality is accepted immediately. The jump back from lower timing quality to higher timing quality is only accepted after expiry of the time set in the Wait to Restore Time box. This applies to the modes Forced and Auto.

If an existing synchronization with a configurable set of reference clock pulse sources is no longer available, the SEC switches from synchronous operation to the Holdover mode.

If the SEC cannot be synchronized with any external clock pulse source, it changes to the Free Running mode.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 71

Use SSM for Selection checkbox With this attribute, you configure if the selection process of timing sources considers the Quality Level (= enable) or not (= disable).

The received timing marker contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received value is the displayed.

S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level

xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1

xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2

xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3

xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4

xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5

xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6

How to Configure the Timing

How to Set Sync Priorities


72 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

8.2 T0 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> SEC... -> T0 -> Configuration...

Timing Source in Use for T0

Displays the current T0 timing source.

Requested Timing Source for T0

The T0 clock pulse can be derived from

• one of the T3 clock pulses (external),

• T1 clock pulses (if an SDH signal is used as timing reference),

• the NE internal clock generator (free running), in case no clock input is available.

- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses. - Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections. - Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.


T1 Configuration

T3 / T4 Configuration


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 73



Timing References Tab

Allows to select the T1 timing references and displays the dedicated Synchronous Status Message (SSMs) information. Also it enables and displays available and selected rejected SSMs.

WTR Tab

Displays WTR information of the T1 timing references and allows to clear the WTR.


74 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


T0 Configuration

T3 / T4 Configuration


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 75



T3:

T3 2 MHz SSM

Allows to set the quality level of the T3 clock by selecting a timing marker. This is necessary, because T3 as a 2.048 MHz normal timing does not contain its own SSM. The timing marker quality level is displayed in front of the selection field.

Quality level type

Quality level (decimal value)

Description

PRC 2 Primary Reference Clock: the normally used high-accuracy timing source

SSU-T 4 Synchronization Supply Unit Transit

SSU-L 8 Synchronization Supply Unit Local

SEC 11 Synchronous Equipment Clock: NE internal timing source

T3 2 Mbit Received SSM Mode

The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does not support this handling.


76 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

T3 Received SSMs

Displays the received quality level information.

Clear WTR T3(1) / T3(2) SSM

Allows to clear the T3(1) and T3(2) WTR times.


T0 Configuration

T1 Configuration


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 77



T4:

Timing Source in Use for T4

Displays the current T4 timing source. In the holdover and free-running modes, the T0 clock pulse has reduced frequency and phase quality. In this case, the T4 clock pulse is switched off (squelched).

Requested Timing Source for T4

- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses. - Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections. - Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections. - Off disconnects the T4 output.

T4 Mode

The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does not support this handling.

Minimum Quality Level for T4

Allows to set the minimum quality level of the T4 clock by selecting a timing marker (see above table).


78 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


T0 Configuration

T1 Configuration


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 79

9 Alarms

9.1 Alarm List


The window displays the alarm information concerning the whole NE in detail.

The window contains a Current and a History tab. Each tab contains a list containing alarm entries and checkboxes for setting filter options for the list. The list uses the option report style for labeling and sorting the list columns.

In the list, one list entry (one line) corresponds to one alarm.

Current tab:

The tab always displays the actually raised alarms. The actual alarm state (acknowledged/unacknowledged) and the alarm severity are displayed. Filter checkboxes (show alarms with severity) for the alarm severities and the alarm states are available.

One alarm entry of the current alarm list consists of:


80 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Location <card name>_<slot number> (.<port number> <bit rate> #<channel number>)

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

State Either unacknowledged or acknowledged

Time Date and time of alarm

Additionally, if the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm indicator is displayed with a blue outline.

Context Menu

Each single alarm entry or multiple list entries of the current list can be selected. For the selected list entries a context menu is available (right mouse click). It provides the alarm acknowledge. If an alarm is acknowledged, the displayed state of the existing list entry is changed. If an alarm is cleared, the corresponding list entry is deleted from the current tab.

Show alarms with severity

You can select, which alarm severity has to be displayed.

Show alarms with state

You can select, whether acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms are displayed.

Alarm Counter

Displays the number of alarms that are counted according to their severity.

History tab:

The tab is a historical log containing all alarm events notified by the NE for the time the LCT is online. Only filter checkboxes for the alarm severities are available. The list contains one particular list entry for each notified alarm event of one alarm

raised

cleared (= no alarm)


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 81

The VC alarms are reported by the interface/switching cards. The assignment IPU-channel/Interface card take place by a list.

The alarm suppression has no influence to the HEL (History Event Log) entry.

Alarm entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.

One alarm entry of the history alarm list consists of:

Column Description


Object Object name

Location <slot number> (.<port number> (<channel number>)

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

Event raised, cleared

Time Time and date of alarm.

Show alarms with severity

The alarm severity is displayed and can be selected.

Click Clear History to clear the entire list.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

How to Suppress Alarms

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance


82 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

TIF Fault Clearance


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 83

9.2 NEAP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> NEAP...

The window gives an overview of the possible alarms with their most important details and allows to configure the alarm severities.

Column Description

Alarm Type Communication or Equipment

Location Logical correlation or signal type

Alarm Name Alarm designation

Object Involved path or unit

Severity Major, Minor, or No


84 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

9.3 Equipment Alarms

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol or of a card symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm information. The window displays all equipment alarm information concerning this object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 85

One alarm entry consists of:

Column Description


Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting) An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.

Time Alarm date and time

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.



Communication Alarms






TIF Fault Clearance


86 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

9.4 Communication Alarms

This window is accessible via the Port Connections (using the context menu of an optical interface card symbol in the port list) -> Subview ...-> STM-n -> Fault -> Communications Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this object/container in detail.



Column Description


Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 87






Notes:

LofDel alarm will also be raised if the other end of the VC-path is terminated on an IFOFES-E card and is not assigned to any port.

VC3 LOM will be raised, if a cross connection exists, but the relating virtual concatenated VC is not assigned with the IFOFES-E card at the far end.



Equipment Alarms






TIF Fault Clearance


88 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

9.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table

IMPORTANT!

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL manual (Operator Guidelines).

Communication Alarms

Object Alarm Severity Description Remedial Action

ETH OPT TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the remote Ethernet termination

Fault not in the home device.

ETH OPT TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet connection of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

ETH OPT TTP Remote Major Fault indication from client

Check client equipment

ETH OPT TTP TD Major Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned SFP soon.

ETH OPT TTP TF Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned SFP.

ETH EL TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the remote Ethernet termination


ETH EL TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet connection of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

ETH EL TTP Remote Major Fault indication from client

Check client equipment

GFP Group LofDel Major Delineation problem of the GFP Group

Check the quality of both, the SDH and the Ethernet traffic

3/9 o´ Clock LofDel Major Delineation problem of the GFP Group serving the ring interfaces of RPR

Check the quality of both, the SDH and the Ethernet traffic

MS AIS Minor Alarm Indication Signal

Fault not in home device.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 89

MS SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.

MS SSF Minor Server Signal Fail Check the concerned configuration settings.

MS RDI Warning Remote Defect Indicator

Check the output signal of the card, which may have prompted the RDI alarm. If it is correct, the concerned card must be replaced.

AU4 LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

SYNC LTI T0 Major Loss of Timing Input T0

Check the timing input. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

SYNC LOF T3 #1,#2 Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

SYNC LOM T3 #1,#2

Minor Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

SYNC LT4 Minor Loss of T4 Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

SYNC LTI T4 Minor Loss of Timing Input T4

Check the timing input. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

SYNC LTS T1 #1.. #8

Minor Loss Of Timing Signal T1 #1.. #8

Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

SYNC LTS T3 #1 #2 Minor Loss Of Timing Signal T3 #1, #2

Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

OS, OS-CO, OS-PA

LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

OS, OS-CO, OS-PA

TxFail Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned SFP.


90 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

OS, OS-CO, OS-PA

TxDeg Minor Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned SFP soon.

RPR Switch RPR 3o´ Clock Span Fail

Minor Link failure at 3 o' clock span


RPR Switch RPR 9o´ Clock Span Fail

Minor Link failure at 9 o' clock span


RPR Switch FOT Major Fail of topology Fault not in the home device.

RPR-LOG-PORT

FE Link Down Major Problem on the remote Ethernet termination


RS TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch

Check the Trail Trace Expected and Received configurations, they must be equal.

RS LOF Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

RS LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

TU LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

VC4 (CTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch


VC4 (CTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.

VC4 (CTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.

VC4 (TTP) LOM Major Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

VC4 (TTP) PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 91

VC4 (TTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch


VC4 (TTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.

VC4 (TTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.

E12 LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

P12 Dem LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

P12 Dem AIS Minor Alarm Indication Signal

Fault not in home device.

P12 Dem EXC Minor Excessive bit error rate

Put the card into a loop circuit. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

P12 Map LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

P12 Map EXC Minor Excessive bit error rate

Put the card into a loop circuit. If still an EXC alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.

P12 Map SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still an SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.

VC12 PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.

VC12 TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch


VC12 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC12 Fault not in home device.


92 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

VC12 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.

VC3 TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch


VC3 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC3 Fault not in home device.

VC3 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance






TIF Fault Clearance


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 93

9.6 E3/VC3 Alarms

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M card port symbol -> Subview... -> E3/VC3 -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...




Column Description


Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name



94 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619







Equipment Alarms



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 95

9.7 1:N MSP Alarms

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1: N protection) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...




Column Description


Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name



96 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619







Equipment Alarms



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 97

9.8 TIF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...

In this window, you can enter individual TIF line names and configure the TIF input polarity for alarm activation, according to your own requirement for telemetry tasks.

How to Configure TIF Ports


98 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

9.9 TCA List


Sorting Scheme (mouse-click on the column header)

The lists on both tabs can be sorted in the following way.

Column sorted by

Object TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order. (Entries of one object are sorted by location, TCA, event, time.)

Location TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order. (Entries of one location are sorted by object, alarm, event, time.)

TCA TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by TCAs in ascending order. (Entries of one alarm are sorted by object, location, event, time.)

Event TCA entries are sorted to raised and cleared. (Entries of one event are sorted by object, location, TCA, time.)

Time The most recent TCA entry is written on the top. (Entries of one time are sorted by object, location, TCA, event.)

Click Clear History to delete all entries in the History list.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 99

Current Tab:

The list on the Current tab contains only actually raised TCAs. The actual state (raised) is displayed.

One TCA entry consists of:

Column Description

Object Object name

Location <card name>_<slot number>.<port> (<bit rate>) <object name>

TCA TCA name

History Tab:

The list on the History tab is a historical log that contains all TCA events notified by the NE as long as the LCT is online.

The list contains one particular list entry for each notified TCA event of one TCA

Event: raised, cleared.

TCA entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten automatically .

The displayed time is the time the NE notified the TCA event based on the NE-Time. This time entry is not overridden by the time stamp contained in the response to a TCA request initiated by the LCT, provided that the response contains the same TCA.

The maximum number of TCA list entries in the history TCA list is 1000 (configurable in the Registry).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 101

10 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows

10.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFO155M port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to the context menus.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.


102 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

10.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 103


This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M port symbol -> Subview...


Note:



104 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> 16x AU4/VC4 -> Subview....



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 105


This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview...


Note:



106 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G type symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 107


This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G port symbol -> Subview...


Note:



108 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

10.8 ETH Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an Ethernet port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to the context menus.

Notes:


Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify coherences.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 109

10.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M or IF345M port symbol respectively -> Subview...

This window shows the E12 or E3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


110 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

10.10 VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of the card symbol with activated concatenation -> Configuration VC4 configuration MUX-VC4 or VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4 #n Configuration...

VC4 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 111

Signal Label:

By default, the signal label is defined by the signal type (PDH, Ethernet, etc.). However, the user can overwrite the signal label for particular applications.

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

VC4 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

There are two modes:

Enabled:

Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS into all LO VCs of this VC4. For ETH cards, the AIS insertion causes a remote insertion towards the ETH port (Tx). TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.


112 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

VC4 Mux Preparation (if offered)

Set the checkbox separately for each TUG-3 to prepare the 21 x TU-12 mux structure.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 113

10.11 VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a switch fabric card symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the VC4 (Mux) #n traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


114 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

10.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow

***DA DEFINIRE***


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 115

11 Protection Traffic Flow

11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


116 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with unprotected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 117

11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFO155M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.


118 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 119

11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections


120 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 121

11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.




122 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G type protection symbol created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 123

11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFO155M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


124 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 125


This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...



126 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of IFS10G type port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 127

11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING -> Subview...



128 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 129

11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...



130 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 131

11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G type port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...




132 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G type protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP protection -> Subview...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 133

11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol with created 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 135

12 Protection Selection Windows

12.1 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview...

This window shows the VC4 Selection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 137

13 Traffic Configuration

13.1 Port Configuration

This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...

Connector Location Distributor

Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object containing the connector location at distributor.

Connector Location NE

Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have been connected.

Port Operational State

Displays the running operation mode.

Loopback (if applicable)

Selection to enable or to disable internal loops.

Fibre Mode (if applicable)

Selection of the fibre mode: Dual Fibre or Single Fibre

Used in Protection (if applicable)

Indicates if the card is used in a protection.


138 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Used as Timing Source (if applicable)

Indicates if the card is used as a timing source.

Carries Traffic Connections (if applicable)


Carries Overhead Connections (if applicable)

Displays the current overhead connections.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 139

13.2 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards


140 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table) -> Port Config...

Supervision


Port VLAN ID [1..4094]

Select the required Port VLAN ID number.

Frame Priority [0..7]

Specify the frame priority.

CUG Mode Selection

Select the CUG mode:

Single:

The CUG Management button is active to open the Single CUG Management Configuration window.

Multi1:

The window is extended by the Multi1 area with the following fields:


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 141

Max. Number Of CUGs

Select the max. number of CUGs.

Max. VLAN Range

Select the max. VLAN range.

CUG ID Offset [0..4093]

Select the CUG ID offset.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi1 CUG Management Configuration window.

Multi2:

The window is extended by the Multi2 area with two selection fields, to move Possible CUG ID values to the CUG ID list.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi2 CUG Management Configuration window.

CUG Management

This button opens the appropriate CUG Management Configuration window.

PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration

PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration


How to Specify the CUG Service Class


142 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

13.3 STM-N Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an optical interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-N -> Configuration...

OS tab:

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 143

Force Laser Shutdown

The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.

Automatic Laser Shutdown

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the automatic laser shutdown. When enabled, the laser transmitter is shut down if there is no input signal. If the Single Fiber Mode is configured (i. e. the Tx and Rx signals are to be combined into one single fiber), ALS should be enabled.

Laser Restart Pulse Width [2..100s]

Displays the configured time the laser is switched on during the automatic and manual laser restart period.

Manual Laser Restart

If the manual laser restart is set, it will restart the laser manually.

No Optical Preamplifier Connected (Normal Mode) (if applicable)

The checkbox is set, if no optical preamplifier is used.

Laser Frequency

Enable the laser frequency configuration (if applicable)

SBS Suppression

Enable the SBS Suppression configuration (if applicable)

Laser Data:

Contains information about the state of the laser and the optical receiver of the optical interface.

RS tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Enabling the trail trace identifier insertion.


Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.


144 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


If checkbox is set: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS. There is no influence to PM counters.

No checkbox setting: TIM will not interrupt the traffic.

Automatic Link Information

If this checkbox is enabled, the NE automatically inserts a value into the sent RS trace, which defines the source port. This feature shall be used for automatic link detection.

Actually Transmitted:

This string is the RS trace generated by the NE, for use with automatic link detection.

Transmitted / Expected:

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G.831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received:


MS tab:

M0 Byte Enable Switch

Disable: only M1-byte is used for REI transmission Enable: additional M0-byte is used for REI transmission

Note: In case of interworking with SL64, disable the M0-byte switch.

Received Timing Marker

Contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received value is the displayed.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 145

S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level

xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1

xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2

xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3

xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4

xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5

xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6

Overwrite Received SSM

The quality level of the SSM from the received STM-N can be overridden by different clock source qualities before being passed to the SETS selection process.

Force don’t use for Sync

By activating this checkbox, you can prevent that the other NE-Party uses this signal as timing source.


Specifies how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.




146 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

13.4 AU4/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...

AU4/VC4 Misc tab:

Supervision


If Supervision is active, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/N.

If Supervision is inactive, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/I only.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]

Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.


Displays how many blocks received per second must be errored in order to declare a Bad Second for SD detection (if SD is cleared).



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 147


Specifies, how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).

VC4 Trail Trace tab:

TTI Processing

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two fields expected and received TTI are displayed.



Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.


Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled: TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Expected


Received



148 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

13.5 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP

For VC3: This window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> TU3 #n -> Configuration...

For VC12: The window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> 21 x TU-12 activated -> Apply -> Close. In the VC4 Mux #n Strukture window, select one of the numbered VC12 symbols (e.g. 1.1.1) -> Configuration...

VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision


No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 8000, for VC12 2000)

The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 149



VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two types, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing


Enabled: Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: Received TTI is monitored butin case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.


Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria at LO switching matrix. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence to PM counters.


Expected


Received



150 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

13.6 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IF345M / IF2M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> VC3 / VC12 -> Configuration...

VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision


RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 = 8000, for VC12 = 2000)



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 151

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).



Signal Label:

Transmitted


Expected


Received


VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing


Enabled: Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: Received TTI is monitored but, in case of TIM no TIM alarm will raise.


Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption; for IF2M/IF345M with insertion of AIS towards the port, for ETH cards with insertion of Remote towards the ETH port. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion.


152 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


ASCII

The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 153

13.7 ETH Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration

Supervision

With this field, the supervision can be enabled or disabled.


Port Monitoring State/Port Operation State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state/port operation state.

If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the ETH signal is present.

Asymmetric Flow Control (to link partner)

If the asymmetric flow control is enabled, pause frames will be generated and transmitted to the link partner if

- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured bandwidth in the ETH-GFP assignment table of the "GFP Assignment" window,

- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured VC capacity in the GFP-SDH assignment table of the "GFP Assignment" window,

- with subchanneling, when the sum of Rx traffic exceeds the VC capacity.

Notes: Incoming pause frames (send by the link partner) will be dropped. Hence the NE will not reduce the speed.

Attention: If 2 ETH ports of the SURPASS hiT 7070 are connected with each other, then the following will occur:


154 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

In case of excessive ETH traffic inputs, both partners will send pause frames, but neither will react to these pause frames. Therefore, frames may be lost with high bit rate und different admission control or VC capacity.

Auto-negotiation (only with IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFOFE-E or IFOFES-E card)

Normal position is "On advertised 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s". Only for older LAN / WAN equipment which didn’t support an "Automatic Negotiation Control" the setting should be "Off Forced 10 Mbit/s" or "Off Forced 100 Mbit/s".

Remote Fault Indication

Enabled: Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH link partner raises Remote alarm. Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.

Note:

If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards. The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port. Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending card that the downlink direction has a problem.

Disabled: The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant path is available).

Laser Data:

Input Power Level [dBm]

Displays the current input power level.

Transmit Frequency [THz]

Displays the current transmit frequency.

Receive Frequency [THz]

Displays the current receive frequency.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 155

Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... -> Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent SFPs.


156 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

13.8 E12 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M port symbol -> Subview... -> E12 -> Configuration...

Supervision





P12

AIS Insertion Towards Port

The AIS insertion to E12 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 157

P12 Mapping Supervision

Port Connection Supervision

disabled = no supervision

enabled = supervision on SD, EXC and LOF in mapping direction

The supervision is only relevant, if the port monitoring is enabled.

If the incoming 2-Mbit/s signal is used as timing source for the clock pulses T0 and T4, the signal must be framed and the port connection supervision must be enabled.

CRC-4 Monitoring

This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC monitor function in mapping direction. If the switch is disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC processing is only relevant, if the port connection supervision and the port monitoring are enabled.

P12 Demapping Processing

Supervision/Retiming

This attribute allows to enable the retiming function for outgoing 2 Mbit/s signals. If enabled, the 2-Mbit/s signal in mapping direction is synchronized to the T0 clock. The signal is then supervised on AIS, EXC and LOF. If disabled, the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal is not supervised and is transmitted transparently. The retimed signal can have frame slips, these slips depends on the frequency offset between the origin PDH signal and the T0. If retiming is enabled, the T0-configuration of the SEC-configuration is not to be configured as "Free Running" or "Holdover" mode. So a reference clock source must be available. If not the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal will have AIS.

CRC-4 Insertion/Monitoring

This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC processing function in demapping direction. If the checkbox is Disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC Processing attribute is only relevant, if the retiming Switch Demapper NE and the termination port monitoring are enabled. The supervision of AIS, EXC and LOF is only relevant, if the termination port monitoring is enabled.


158 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

13.9 E3 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a microshelf, port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M port symbol -> Subview... -> E3 -> Configuration...

Supervision





P3

AIS Insertion Towards Port

The AIS insertion to P3 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 159

13.10 IFSOA – Config

{bmct ifsoa-pdc.bmp}

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an xxxxxx card symbol -> Information ->

Connector Location Distributor

Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object containing the connector location at distributor.

Connector Location NE

Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have been completed.

Port Operational State

Displays the running operation mode.


Type of Connection Reference

Relates to the fiber interconnection between the cards

Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.

External: Interconnection to another NE


In case of Internal Interconnection, the connected I cards must be configured correctly.

Optical Input Power

Displays the current input power level.


160 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Force Laser Shutdown

The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 161

14 Multiplex Structure

14.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure

This window is accessible via the Module View in the port list, by the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 (Mux) #n symbol [with activated mux structure]) -> Subview...

This window shows the VC4 Mux traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 163

15 Cross Connections

15.1 Cross Connections List


or via the Main Menu -> CrossConnections -> CC List...

In this window, you can set filter options and add, delete and display CCs (cross connections).

There are different CC types as follows:

1. Unidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the CP used as connection start point CP2, indicating the CP used as connection end point

2. Bidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the 1st CP used as connection start/end point CP2, indicating the 2nd CP used as connection start/end point

3. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) head end CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection end point CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point

4. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) tail end CC, with CP parameter set: CP1(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start point CP1(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point CP2, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point

5. Bidirectional (protected for SNCP) CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start/end point CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point


164 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

6. Combined CCs are the ones, using the Low Order SF card, which means that more than on CC is used. This include both complete and incomplete CCs, that have more than one CC.

7. Complete CCs are all, where traffic passes, this means those that have VC4 TPs in the end. This can be a normal CC between two VC4 or combined CC, that use the LO SF card.

8. Incomplete CCs are the ones, where traffic doesn't pass usually, because a CC is missing to make a complete combined CC. This are usually CCs between a HO card and the LO card or a combination, which includes also a CC between the LO card, but no other CC from the LO to an HO card.

The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

With an IFQGBE-E, IFOFE-E or IFQGBE card cross connection, the GFP Assignment... button opens the GFP Assignment window.

With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window.

How to Create a Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection



How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

How to Add and Remove Path Protections

How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection

How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR

How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 165

How to Delete a Cross Connection


166 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

15.2 Plain Cross Connections List

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> CC Plain List...

The plain cross connection list shows the real existing physical cross connections. In this window, you can add, modify, delete and display cross connections.

The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

The GFP Assignment... button opens the SDH GFP Assignment window.





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 167



How to Add and Remove Path Protections



How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection



How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options

How to Delete a Cross Connection


168 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

15.3 Add Cross Connection

This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an entry in the list) -> Add.

This window allows to create a new cross connection.

The selected CC Type is displayed graphically. A dashed line indicates the protection path.

After selecting VC Level, Card and TP, the "To TP A >>" button copies the selected TP to the TP A field in the New CC area. After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B >>" button copies the selected TP to the TP B field in the New CC area. After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B' >>" button copies the selected TP to the TP B’ field in the New CC area (in case of a protected cross connection). The Reset TPs button clears all selected TPs in the New CC area.

Note:

The VC-Level LCAS-VC12-nv/VC3-nv is a possibilty to connect the complete VC group from the ETH card to a SDH card.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 169

It can only be used, if the members of a VC group are adjacent (e.g. LCAS-VC12-5v 1.1.1, 1.2.1, 1.3.1, 1.2.1, 1.2.2). Otherwise the LCT connects VC12 which are not in the VC group. In the TP index field of the TPs, the first member of the group must be selected as TP (i.e. 1.1.1 of the LCAS-VC12-5v).

The Propose Connection button defines the new connection and inserts it into the cross connection list.

The Connect button creates the cross connection.

In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.

The Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.

The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.












170 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

15.4 Cross Connection Details

This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an entry in the list) -> Details...

After selecting a list entry by clicking in one of the TP columns, the selected TP is displayed below.

The Config... button opens the AU4/VC4 Configuration window

With an IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFOFES-E, IFOFGE, IFQGBE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E card cross connection, the GFP Assignment... button opens the GFP Assignment window.

With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window.

After selecting a list entry the following buttons are active:

The Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection window.

The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window


The Concat members... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Details window.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 171

15.5 Cross Connections Graphic

This window is accessible e.g. via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections... -> Graphic...

This window is a graphical illustration of the configured cross connections and involved cards, sorted by cross connection protocols.

The SF160G card contains the HO cross connections represented by the lines in the HO CC column of the Graphic view. This card is not displayed by itself because it has no own termination points. The SF2G5 cards contain the LO cross connections represented by the lines in the LO CC column.

If you click a graphical connecting line, the involved cards are highlighted.

Protection is not displayed in the Graphic view.


172 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Add...

Opens the Add Cross Connection window.

List...

Opens the Cross Connections List window.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 173

15.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details

This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button

-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Graphic Details...

This window shows the TP relations of the selected cross connection. The context menus of the symbols allow to display the Graphic Details of the next entry in the Cross Connections List, if applicable.


174 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

15.7 Modify Cross Connection

This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button

-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Modify...

This window allows to modify the CC type and TP selection of an existing cross connection.

The Add Protection button allows to add a protection to an existing cross connection.

The Swap and Add Protection button swaps TP A and TP B termination points and adds a TP B' termination point.

The Remove Work. Path button removes the working path of an existing protected cross connection.

The Remove Prot. Path button removes the protecting path of an existing protected cross connection.

The Disconnect button opens a window with a traffic interrupt warning, for disconnect the selected connection.

The Details... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 175

15.8 Overhead Cross Connections

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...

In this window, you can create and display various bidirectional OH Cross Connections.

OH TP List tab:

Filter:

The OH Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.

The OH TP List displays all OH termination points.

Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading (including the first column).


176 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Column Description

(Symbol) Indication if this TP is involved in an OH CC

or not

The symbol is marked by a blue frame, if the TP is already set as TP A or TP B, but not yet connected.

OH Termination Point Details about involved subrack, slot, port and card and OH type.

Connection State Either Connected, if the termination point is involved in a Cross Connection or Free, if the termination point is not involved.

OH CC Type <type of TP A> - <Type of TP B>

Direction Displays the direction type of the OH TP

Involved As One of: TPA, TPB

If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP A button sets it as TP A for a new OH CC.

If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP B button sets it as TP B for a new OH CC.

If a list entry with connected OH CC is selected, the Select OH CC button displays details about the OH CC in the New OH Cross Connection field.

Before a new OH CC is connected, the TP A and TP B settings can be reset using the Reset TPs button.

The Connect button creates a new OH CC.

OH CC List tab:

Filter:

The Cross Connection list can be filtered by setting filter options.

The OH CC list displays all established Cross Connections.

Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading.

One Cross Connection entry consists of:

Column Description

OH CC Type Cross Connection type.

Direction Displays the direction type of the OH CC type

TP A, TP B Termination points


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 177

The Disconnect button deletes the selected OH CC from the list.

How to Create an OH Cross Connection

How to Set OH Cross Connection Filter Options

How to Delete OH Cross Connections


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 179

16 Protection Management

16.1 Protection Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -> Protection...

This window contains all prepared and created protection groups in the NE, depending on the currently configured Required Equipping of the NE.

Column Description

Protection Symbol Red cross: not active; Green small hook: active

Type Type of protection switching

Exists either yes or no

Working/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/East <slot number> <card type> <port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Working/East <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protect. State State of protection switching

To change to a specific Traffic Flow window, double-click the appropriate list entry.

Create

Creates the selected protection in the list.


180 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Add 1:N MSP ...

Opens the Add 1:N MSP window.

Add Link Protection

Opens the Add Extension Link Protection window.

Delete

Deletes the selected protection in the list.





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 181

17 1 plus 1 MSP Protection

17.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an optical interface card symbol with created 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview... -> 1+1 MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (1 + 1).

Working

Displays the working port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting port.


182 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

MSP Control:

Active Line Section

Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.

Protection Mode

In the list, the changeover type is displayed: Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any 1+1 MSP protection switching. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching.

Line Switching Type

Unidirectional or Bidirectional.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:

Availability State

Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:

Activated or De-activated.

Note:

If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled, then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated to the protection card.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 183

18 1 to 1 MSP Protection

18.1 1:1 MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview... -> 1:1 MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (1:1 MSP).

Working


Protecting



184 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

MSP Control:

Active Line Section

Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.

Extra Traffic Squelch State

Displays the Extra Traffic Squelch State.

Protection Mode

In the list, the changeover type is displayed: Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.

Operator Command


Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Lockout prevents any 1:1 MSP protection switching. Exercise Switch is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol

Line Switching Type

Unidirectional or Bidirectional.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:

Availability State


Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)


MSP Activation

In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:

Activated or De-activated.

Note:

If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled, then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated to the protection card.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 185

19 1 to N MSP Protection

19.1 1:N MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays 1:N line architecture.


186 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Protecting

Displays the protection card and port.

Working:

The list displays the port and allows to configure some protection settings.

The Extend... button opens the 1:N MSP Extension window.

The Reduce button removes the port from the list.

MSP Control:

Switching State

Displays the switching state.

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type: Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.

Operator Command

Allows to set the priority of the protection switching:

Clear (abort the WTR) requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Lockout prevents any 1:N MSP protection switching. The Forced To command has a higher priority than the Manual To command. They request immediate protection switching. Exercise To is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Operator Command Port

Displays the operator command port.

Line Switching Type

Displays the line switching type.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type.

Availability State


Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min]

Allows to configure the Wait to Restore Time.

MSP Activation

Allows to select the protection switching function state.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 187

Note:

If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled, then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated to the protection card


188 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

19.2 Add 1:N MSP

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP...

Bitrate

Allows to set the bit rate level.

Protection Port

Allows to select a protection port, if applicable.

Working Ports:

This area lists the selected working ports and allows to configure them, as long as the corresponding 1:N protection is not yet activated.

The Add... button opens the Add Working Ports window.

After a port is added, you can configure the port number and the Low or High priority.

The Delete button removes the selected port from the list.

The Apply button transfers the configured port(s).to the Protection Management list.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 189

19.3 1:N MSP Extension

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with created 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration... -> Extend...

Worker Section Number

Displays the worker section number.

Worker Priority

Allows to configure the worker priority.

Additional Working Port Allows to configure an additional working port.


190 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

19.4 Add Working Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP... -> Add...

After a port is marked in the Possible Working Ports list, it can be moved to the Selected Working Ports list using the ">>" button, or vice versa using the "<<" button.

The Apply button copies the selected ports(s) into the Working Ports list in the Add 1:N MSP window.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 191

19.5 Working STM-1 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> (n x) STM-1 -> Subview...

This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


192 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

19.6 Working VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the (n x) AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 193

20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection

20.1 2F SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...

This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure particular items.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring).


194 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

East / West

Displays the assigned ports.

2F-SPRING Control:

Active Ring Section

Displays the ring section that is being used

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.

Operator Command


Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of Protection commands is not possible. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Ring Segmentation Mode

Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841

Availability State

Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)


MSP Activation

Activate / deactivate the MSP.

Configure Ring Topology

Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.

Squelch...

Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 195



196 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

20.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING X -> Configuration...


Note:


Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 197

East / West


2F-SPRING Control:

Main Traffic Active Ring Section


Extra Traffic West Squelch State

Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)

Extra Traffic East Squelch State

Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)

Protection Mode


Operator Command


Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of Protection commands is not possible. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.



K1/K2 Protocol Type


Availability State




MSP Activation


Note: In case of a deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).


198 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619



Squelch...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 199

20.3 4F SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 4F-SPRING protection) -> Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration...


Note:



200 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Four Fibre Shared Ring).

Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East


4F-SPRING Control:

Active Ring Section East / Active Ring Section West


Protection Mode


Operator Command West / Operator Command East


Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of Protection commands is not possible. The Forced commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.



K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Four Fibre Shared Ring - ITU G.841

Availability State




MSP Activation



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 201



Squelch...




202 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

20.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with installed 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING -> Configuration... -> Configure Ring Topology

In this window, you can configure the ring nodes with a symbolized graphical view of the ring.

Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 203

Number of ring nodes [3..16]

Enter the number of the ring nodes.

In the graphical display, nodes that are not used are grayed out.

Own Node ID [0..15]

Enter your own node ID.

Ring Map

Select a node ID for each ring node. The node ID must be unique within the ring.

2F-SPRING Configuration

2F-SPRING Extra Configuration

4F-SPRING Configuration




204 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

20.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING -> Configuration... -> Squelch...

Squelch Event Report Control

Allows to enable / disable the squelch event report control.

Squelch State

Displays the Receive / Transmit West / East squelch states for each AU4.

Squelch Table

Allows to configure the Node IDs for each AU4 in Receive and Transmit directions.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 205

20.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 8 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...



206 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

20.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 207

20.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...




208 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ... -> 32x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 209

20.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 32 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...



210 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 211

20.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> 64x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...




212 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ...-> 128x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 213

20.14 <2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config

This window is accessible via the context menu card where SPRING protection is configured -> Protection... -> double click on the line of the wished spring protection -> select Configuration in the context menu of the SPRING symbol -> Nut... push-button

Nut table

It is possible for the selected AU4 No. to enable or disable the Ring Switch, Span switch.


214 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

20.15 4F-Spring X Config

***DA DEFINIRE***

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).

Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East


Main Traffic Active Ring Section


Extra Traffic West Squelch State

Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 215

Extra Traffic East Squelch State

Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type.

Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set.



K1/K2 protocol type


Availability State

Displays wether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive)

Enter the wait restore time.

MSP Activation


Note: In case of deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 217

21 Link Protection

21.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...

This window shows the Main ISTM 4 and if applicable the ESM ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to their context menus.


218 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

21.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol (with installed link protection) -> Subview... -> I-LINK-PROT -> Configuration...

Working

Displays the working card and port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting card and port

Extension Link Protection Control:

Active Link Section

Displays the active link section.

Operator Command

Allows to select a protection command to be performed.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 219

21.3 Add Extension Link Protection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add Link Protection...

Main Shelf:

Working Port

Allows to select the working port.

Connected to Extension Shelf

Displays the connection status.

Protecting Port

Allows to select the protecting port.

Connected to Extension Shelf

Displays the connection status.

Extension Shelf:

SUBRACK

Allows to select the subrack.


220 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Working Port


Protecting Port



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 221

21.4 ISTM 4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration

Supervision





Received . . . Connection:

Port

Displays the port.

Identifier

Displays the identifier

Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)

With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.


222 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

21.5 ESM ISTM 4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration

Supervision

With the field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.




Received . . . Connection:

Port

Displays the port.

Identifier

Displays the identifier

Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)

With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 223

22 Concatenations

22.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation. Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


224 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

22.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -> Subview...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 225


This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of a IFQGBE port symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 -> [VC4] Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview



226 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFQGBE symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 32 x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4-7v -> Subview...



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 227


This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-16v concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-16v #n -> Subview...



228 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

22.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ... -> VC4-64v -> Subview

This window shows the Virtual AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 229

22.7 Concatenated VC4 Configuration

{bmct 15201a.bmp}

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 or n x AU4/VC4 -> (VC4) Subview ... -> VC4-nv or VC4-nc -> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to the configuration menu.

In Case of Virtual Concatenation VC4-nv

VC4-nv Misc:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)


Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

In Case of Contiguous Concatenation VC4-nc

VC4-nc Misc tab:

Supervision



230 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)



The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.




Concatenation Type

Displays the selected type of contiguous concatenation.

VC4-nc Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.


Enabled:


Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.


Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 231



Received



232 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

22.8 VC12-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation. Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.

Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv -> Subview...

VC12-2v Misc:

Supervision



Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.

Concatenation Type



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 233

22.9 VC3-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 -> VC4 Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) -> Subview... -> VC3-2v -> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to supervision configuration.

VC3-2v Misc:

Supervision


Concatenation Type



234 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

22.10 Concatenation Configuration

The windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an ETH cards and SF2G5/SF10G: Card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 235

SDH cards: Port symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

This window allows you to select templates for concatenation groups.

Note:

With the PF2G5, IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFQGBEB-E and IFQGBE-E cards, the user must select a template (see below). For LO switching fabric SF10G/SF2G5 and IFOFES-E, the user has to configure first the VC4 multiplex structure. Otherwise only VC3 concatenations are possible.

IFOFES-E: (via the context menu of the IFOFES-E card) Configuration -> VC4 Configuration -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with both VC4s of the IFOFES-E card. A VC12-nv can only consist of VC12 containers that originate from the same VC4. With VC3-2v, both VC3 containers must originate from the same VC4.

SF2G5/SF10G: (via the context menu of the SF2G5/SF10G card) -> Subview... -> nx VC4 selection window -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with all VC4s.

If an entry in the list is selected, the Details... button opens the Concatenation Details window.

The Add... button (if offered) opens the Add Concatenation Group window.

The Delete button (if offered) deletes the selected entry.

The Modify LCAS... button (if offered) opens the Modify LCAS Concatenation Group window.

The Template... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Group Templates selection window.

The Modify Template (if offered) button allows a member shift between two neighboured VC4-nv groups.

The Delete Template... button (if offered) deletes all concatenation groups.

Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).

The following templates are available:

For the PF2G5 card:


236 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Template 1 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 1xVC4-3v)

Template 2 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-4v)



For the IFOFE / IFOFE-E card:

Template 5 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4)

Template 6 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4-5v, 1xVC4-4v)


Template 8 (8xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)


Template 10 (8xVC3, 2xVC3-2v, 3xVC4-4v)


For the IFQGBE / IFQGBEB card and the IFQGBE-E / IFQGBEB-E card:

Template 11 (4xVC4, 4xVC4-7v)




Template 17 (4xVC4-8v)




How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 237

22.11 Concatenation Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation..., select via Template button a template -> Apply; select a line from the list and press the Details button

This windows displays details about the selected concatenation group.


238 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

22.12 Add Concatenation Group

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...

Concatenation Type

Select the required type from the list.

Group ID

Enter the group ID. It depends on the card type.

Available TPs / Selected TPs

Select the required TPs and click >> to move them into the Selected TPs list.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 239

22.13 Concatenation Group Templates

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Template...

This window offers some proven concatenation group templates to ease the configuration.

Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).

Note: If a VC4-nv is to be generated, the selected template must contain two VC4-4v.

Note: For VLAN operation modes, only templates containing VC3 or VC3-2v should be selected. High order VC´s (VC4 and VC4-nv) cannot be assigned to VLAN concentrators.

GFP Assignment



240 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

22.14 Modify Template

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFOFE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... (select an entry in the list) -> Modify Template...

This window can be used to generate VC4-nv containers.

Note:

Only two VC4-4v can be changed in one template.

Two VC4-nv can be generated, but the sum must always be eight VC4s.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 241

22.15 VCLO-Concatenation Configuration

***DA DEFINIRE***


Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 243

23 VLAN

23.1 VLAN Functionality

General remarks on VLAN functionality VLAN functionality is supported by the IFQGBEB (optical) and IFQGBEB-E (electrical) cards. These card types can be configured in 3 different modes.

1. Point to point mode (P2P) All 4 ETH ports working P2P like IFQGBE /-E cards.

2. VLAN C mode Cards are running with 2 independent VLAN Concentrators: VLAN C1 on gigabit ETH port #1 VLAN C2 on gigabit ETH port #3 ETH ports #2 and #4 are switched OFF in this mode. There is a fixed relation between Concentrator -- GFP Group -- VC as follows: ETH port #1 - VLAN C1 -- GFP group #1 - #8 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 1-16. ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9 - #16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32.

3. Mixed Mode Cards are running with 2 ports point to point (P2P) mode and one port with VLAN concentrator functionality as follows: ETH port #1 and #2 - P2P mode -- GFP group #1 or #2 -- AU channels of range 1-16 ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9-16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32 ETH port #4 - switched OFF Change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the already applied card configuration.

Uplink and Downlink functionality

On VLAN modes it is distinguished between uplink and downlink.

Uplink is related to the gigabit ports ETH #1 and #3 of IFQGBEB /-E, that the concentrators C1 and C2 are internally connected to.

Downlink is related to the VCs, that they can be assigned to the concentrators GFPs.

These VCs carrying ethernet frames through GFP encapsulation can be crossconnected via the SDH network to the so called downlink port on other ethernet cards.

Basic functionality of the concentrators from downlink VCs to uplink port (upstream direction):

• Receiving ethernet frames on assigned VCs with GFP encapsulation

• Determination of VLAN ID for received frame according to user defined table (Add VLAN ID Assignment)


244 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

• Decapsulating ethernet frame (removal of GFP header)

• Inserting of VLAN Tag in ethernet frame

• Sending out tagged frame on gigabit uplink

• Processing of up to 8 GFP groups

• Processing of up to 8 subchannels per GFP group

Basic functionality of the concentrators from uplink port to downlink VCs (downstream direction):

• Receiving of VLAN tagged frame on gigabit uplink port

• CRC and VLAN tag present check

• Determination of downlink VC - GFP channel for received tagged ethernet frame according to user derfined table (Add VLAN ID Assignment)

• Removal of VLAN tag

• Removal of ETH frames with not determined VLAN tag

• Encapsulating of ethernet frame into GFP frames

• Mapping GFP encapsulated ethernet frame in assigned downlink VC

Note: On the downlink VC, only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. Regarding the Concatination Config for VLAN modes its therefore recommended to use template 18 in case of VLAN C mode and template 19 or 20 in case of Mixed mode.

Tag interpretation in VLAN modes

VLAN Tag format accoding to 802.1q:

Type Field

• Ethertype 0x8100 will be inserted in upstream direction and is expected for tagged frames received on gigabit uplink port towards downstream

Priority Field

• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)

• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)

CFI Field

• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)

• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 245

VLAN ID

• 1 ... 4094 freely configurable

Stacked VLANs or VLAN tunneling is supported, but there is no support for structured VLANs (i.e. 4095x4095 VLAN IDs for interpreting two subsequent VLAN headers in one Frame).

Downstream VLAN tagged frames received on the gigabit uplink port which are shorter than 68 bytes (64 ... 67 Bytes including VLAN tag) will be extended to 64 byte length again after the removal of the VLAN tag in the concentrator (padding). This extension is done by adding a maximum of 4 bytes at the end of the frame before the FCS bytes.

Mutual influence of downstream speeds through flowcontrol on gigabit upstream port

Ports of IFQGBEB and IFQGBEB-E cards belonging to a VLAN concentrator domain do not support admission control like IFQGBE and IFQGBE-E and the Point to Point (P2P) mode of VLAN cards do. This means that an incoming VLAN stream on the gigabit uplink port assigned to a downstream capacity of VC3 or VC3-2v cannot be limited by means of admission control. Therefore care has to be taken at the device connected to the gigabit upstream port, to not overrun the assigned downstream VCs. This goal can be reached through limiting the data rate of such a stream on the router / server site according to the assigned downstream VC capacity.

If a downstream VC is overrunned, two scenarios have to be considered:

• Asymmetric Flow Control is enabled on the gigabit uplink port. MAC control frames (Pause) will be send out on the gigabit port. Since pause frames cannot be classified all the VLAN streams of the device connected to the gigabit uplink port will be slowed down to the speed of the overrunned downstream VC.

• Asymmetric Flow Control is disabled on the gigabit uplink port. Frames in downstream direction will be discarded in case the assigned downstream VC capacity is exceeded.


246 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

23.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to GFP relation. Context menues of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line between GFP group and VC symbol indicates that for this GFP group no VC assignment has yet been done. The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted line. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.

Note for VLAN operation:

The VLAN functionality only makes sense if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these point-to-multipoint applications QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e. BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.

If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as the egress buffers of a receiving FE card may happen. By this packet loss will not be avoidable (depending on the situation):


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 247

• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.

• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of the receiving FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow control has influence on all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the possible 8 downlink ports): If for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the activated pause frame mechanism will stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).


248 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

23.3 VLAN Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add... -> Apply -> Close. In the VLAN C #n Traffic Flow window select VLAN C #n -> Subview

This window shows all assigned VLAN IDs per VLAN concentrator. It gives access to the VLAN communication alarm and copy function of the alarm setting onto other VLAN IDs.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 249

23.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VC structure has to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window.

On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 and VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!

The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.

Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be dropped.

On VLAN C mode GFP group #1- #8 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 1 on ETH uplink port #1.

GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.

On VLAN uplink port #1 (GFP group #1 - #8) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be assigned.


250 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

In VLAN C mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator. These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #1 or #3 (uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.

Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as in IFQGBE /-E cards or P2P mode.

Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #1 or #3) in downstream direction to not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the VC.

The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

VLAN ID Assignment...

Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

VLAN C ETH Config...

Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 251

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel


252 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

23.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State: Mixed -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

VLAN C-GFP Assignment

On VLAN mixed mode GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.

ETH-GFP Assignment

Here ETH ports #1 and #2 running in standard point to point mode can be configured.

Assign ETH ports #1 and #2 to the GFP group #1 or #2 and enter the bandwidth for each ETH port.

The value range is configurable : 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Note:

The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC). Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s, VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.

All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 253

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window. Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.

Assignment point to point mode GFP groups #1 and #2 On GFP Group #1 and #2 VCs of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be assigned.

The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains both 2 point to point mode ports (ETH #1 and #2).


Assignment VLAN C2 - GFP Groups #9 - #16:

On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 & VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators.


The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.

If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

In VLAN C Mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator. These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #3 (uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.

Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as in IFQGBE /-E cards or point to point mode. Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #3) in downstream direction to not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the VC.

Equal for all GFP Groups:

The supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

Note:

If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel alarm is raised. This alarm also raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.


254 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption (in all VLAN & point to point GFPs)!

VLAN ID Assignment...

Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

VLAN C ETH Config...


ETH Config...




VC4 Subview...





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 255

23.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids...

This window displays information about assigned VLAN Ids. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate window, showing the assigned IDs.

The Add... button opens the Add VLAN ID Assignment window, to assign new VLAN IDs.

With the Delete button, a selected VLAN ID from the list can be deleted.

Note: Deleting a VLAN ID stops traffic in UP- and downstream direction through the concentrator for the before assigned GFP channel.


256 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

23.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add...

In this window, make the necessary VLAN assignment settings. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate window for VLAN ID assignments.

With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.

First choose the GFP group and GFP channel in that your signal is running and then set the desired VLAN ID for that stream.

If subchanneling is enabled for the respective GFP group (in GFP Assignment window) GFP channel 0...7 are available to assign to a VLAN ID. In case subchanneling was disabled (in GFP Assignment window) the GFP channel line is grayed out. (The dim visable `0´ is a default that can be ignored.) Once a VLAN ID has been assigned to a GFP group/channel without subchanneling this group will no longer be available in the GFP group line for selection.

VLAN IDs can be assigned to a GFP group/channel without having assigned a VC3 or VC3-2v to that group before.

With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.

VLAN IDs can be freely selected in the area of 1...4094. VLAN ID 0 and 4095 are reserved as stated in 802.1Q and can therefore not be assigned.

VLAN Functionality


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 257

24 Virtual VCs

24.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-nv concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-2v #n -> Subview...



258 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

24.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation. Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 259

Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv -> Subview... -> Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision


RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of the IFOFES-E cards.


The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (BIP2).



Signal Label: (only IFOFES-E cards)

Transmitted


Expected


Received


Virtual VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (only IFOFES-E cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing




260 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.


For SF2G5/SF10G cards: Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.


For IFOFES-E cards: Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.




Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 261

24.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -> Subview... -> Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...


262 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


Supervision


RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of ETH cards.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1.. 8000]



No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2..10]


Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)

Transmitted


Expected


Received



The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal..





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 263


For SF2G5/SF10G cards: Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.


For ETH cards: Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.




Received


Virtual VC4 Configuration


264 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

24.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC4-4v... -> Apply. Return to the Port List symbol -> Subview... -> 4x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-4v -> Subview -> Virtual AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...


Supervision (if available)


RDI/REI Insertion (if available)

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.







A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 265

Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC4 signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected signal label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Received



The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing






For SDH cards: Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.


For ETH cards: Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.



266 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619



Received


Virtual VC3 Configuration


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 267

25 GFP Configurations

25.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview...


268 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

Note:

Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify coherences.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 269

25.2 GFP Group Subview

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Group Subview...

This window shows the GFP groups and gives access to their context menus.


270 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

25.3 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

Note:

If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel alarm is raised.

ETH-GFP Assignment

Through this table, an Ethernet port is assigned to a GFP group which can consist of one or more GFP channels. Subchanneling is implemented if several Ethernetports are assigned to a single GFP group.

Assign ETH ports to the GFP groups (if provided) and enter the Bandwidth for each ETH port.

The value range depends on the port type:

Fast Ethernet 10Base-TX: 1...10 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Fast Ethernet 100Base-TX: 1...100 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Gigabit Ethernet 1000Base-SX/LX: 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Notes:

The IFOFES-E card does not support admission control (bandwidth limitation). This can be done by adding or removing VC12 containers of a virtual concatenation group (2 Mbit/s granularity).

The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC). Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s, VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.

All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 271

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window.

Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.


The Subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.

The IFOFES-E card does not support subchanneling (extension header). Therefore the user must pay attention that the incoming VC/VC group does not have an extension header, otherwise all ETH frames will be dropped.



This alarm is raised if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

ETH Config...




VC4 Subview...


PF2G5 GFP Assignment




272 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

25.4 PF2G5 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

LP Bandwidth Configuration

Enter the Ingress Bandwidth and Egress Bandwidth for each LP port.

Value range: 1...450 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

GFP-SDH Assignment

Assign the VC or VC group to each GFP group and enable/disable supervision.

RPR-SDH Assignment

Select Quad or Single SDH Capacity and assign the VC or VC group to the RPR and enable/disable supervision.

Port Config...

Opens the PF2G5 Config window, after selecting a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table.


Opens the GFP Group Selection window.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 273

VC4 Subview...


How to Create / Delete VC Channels



How to Configure RPR Bandwidths

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG



274 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

25.5 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Single CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

CUG ID [0..4095]

Select the CUG ID.

Service Class

Select the Service Class.

Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.

Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.

Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.

VLAN Mode

Select the VLAN mode.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 275




276 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

25.6 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi1 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

The table allows to enter the Multi1 CUG configuration settings according to the network planning.




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 277

25.7 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

Tunnel Tag Prot ID

Enter the Tunnel Tag Prot ID

The table allows to enter the Multi2 CUG configuration settings according to the network planning.




278 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

25.8 PF2G5 Add CUG

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode, move at least 1 entry from the "Possible CUG ID values" list to the "CUG ID list") -> Apply -> CUG Management -> Add CUG

CUG ID [1..4095]

Select the CUG ID.

Tunneling Mode

Activate / Deactivate the tunneling mode.

Service Class

Select the Select Class.

Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]

Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.

Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]

Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.

Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]

Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 279

PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration





280 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

25.9 SDH GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> Plain List... (e.g. using a cross connection of an IFOFGE-E card, by selecting an entry in the list) -> GFP Assignment...

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window.

Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.


The VC/VC Group column allows to select a VC.


This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

ETH Config...





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 281

VC4 Subview...




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 283

26 LCAS

26.1 LCAS State Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> LCAS State...

This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With filters, the operator can select special groups.

Filter:

The Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.

Selected Item:

Sink

Displays the sink state.

Source

Displays the source state.


284 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

LCAS Source Direction State

Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

Note: One member of a LCAS group could have three states: idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated active = the LCAS protocol is activated failed = failure in the signal


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 285

26.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E card with VC3 or VC12 LCAS concatenation -> Configuration -> Concatenation (with an entry in the list selected) -> Modify LCAS...

This window allows to select the number of members in the concatenation and to select the associated TPs from the list of available TPs.


286 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

26.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Configuration...

LCAS VC3-1v Misc:

Supervision


Concatenation Type


Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps

Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.

LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold

Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.

Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC3-2v (2x 48 Mbit = 96 Mbit) and the threshold is set to 90, then an alarm rises, when 1 VC3 is turned out.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 287

26.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in the upper part of the Module View -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Configuration -> TP...

LCAS VC12-1v Misc:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision for this LCAS group alarms. This supervision has no influence to the alarms of the included VCs.

Concatenation Type


Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps

Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.

LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold

Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.

Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set to 7, then an alarm rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.


288 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

26.5 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the context menu(s).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 289

26.6 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ...

This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the context menu(s).


290 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

26.7 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview... -> LCAS Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...

LCAS VC3 Misc tab:

Supervision


RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI.




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 291




Signal Label:

Transmitted


Expected


Received


LCAS State:

Sink

Displays the sink state.

Source

Displays the source state.

LCAS Source Direction State Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

LCAS VC3 Trail Trace tab:

The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing


Enabled:


Disabled:



Enabled: TIM will switch off this VC, the VC group capacity will be reduced by this VC. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.


292 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

TIM will cause RDI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion.



Received



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 293

26.8 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ... -> LCAS Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...

LCAS VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision of this VC.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.




294 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (BIP2).



Signal Label:

Transmitted


For GFP mapping, the signal label = 13.

Expected


Received


LCAS State:

Sink

Displays the sink state, i.e. the state of the incoming single VC.

Source

Displays the source state, i.e. the state of the outgoing single VC, as received by the remote station.

Note: In order to have LCAS traffic, at least one of the source members must be set to "Active".

LCAS Source Direction State

Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

To increase the group capacity, this VC can be added by setting it to Active. This increases the capacity in outgoing direction.

Note: One member of a LCAS group could have three states: idle = the LCAS protocol is not activated active = the LCAS protocol is activated failed = failure in the VC12

LCAS VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 295

TTI Processing


Enabled:


Disabled:



Enabled: TIM will cause an interruption of this single VC and will reduce the group capacity. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic or reduce the group capacity. TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion.



Received



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 297

27 MCF General

27.1 Message Communication Functions

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...

This window contains functional symbols representing the different layers for message communication. The symbols are used to select the components of the MCF.

Context Menu:

In the View, right-click the symbol to open the respective context menu.


298 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

27.2 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration...

Notes:

When stack parameters are changed, the stack restarts. Connection to NE has to be reestablished.

Layer 4 (Transport):

Window Timer [5..1009]/10s

The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.

Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]

Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement for this packet from the opposite station.

Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 299

Specifies the time after the data packet is repeated if no acknowledgement for this packet by the opposite station was received.

Layer 3 (NSAP):

Area Address

The address range forms part of the NSAP address (area, system ID, and selector) and is mainly defined by the first byte of the NSAP address. That first byte, called AFI, defines the length and the byte rate from all three parts. The NSAP address has to be fixed by the DCN planning.

Note:

The NSAP address has to be unique.

System ID

The System ID is 6 Bytes long.

Note:

The System ID as part of the NSAP address has to be planned by the DCN planning team.

NSAP Selector [1.255]

The NSAP Selector is a part of the own NSAP address.

Note:

The NSAP selector has to be "01"!

Layer 3 (CLNS):

CLNS Maximum Lifetime [2..255]

Displays the maximum lifetime of a CLNS PDU in steps of 0.5 seconds. If a CLNS PDU is forwarded by an intermediate system, the lifetime of this PDU is always decremented by at least 0.5 seconds.

Routing Principle

Displays if a system belongs to the OSI routing backbone (L2) or to an single OSI area only (L1).

Note:

The configuration is only accessible to user level 4. A change of configuration could be followed by a loss of connection.

How to Configure NSAP Settings


300 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

27.3 MCF Transport Connection Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Information...

In this window, the performance information of a connection to a remote NE is displayed.

Remote NSAP Address

Displays the NSAP Address of the connected LCT/NCT/OS.

Remote T Selector

T Selector used by the remote manager for this transport connection.

Local T Selector

T Selector used by this NE for this transport connection.

Connection Type

Direction of the transport connection setup. (Outgoing = sent from the local system, Incoming = sent from the remote system).

Window Timer [5..1009]/10s

The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 301

Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]

Displays, how often a data packet (Acknowledge) has to be repeated.

Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]

Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement from the opposite station.


302 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

27.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...

This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 303

28 MCF CLNS

28.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Information...

This window displays information for network configuration for the local NE.

Destination Areas

Address Prefix displays the address part of the destination area.

Path Cost displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.

Adjacency Reference List Number contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.


304 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Destination Systems

NSAP Address displays the NSAP of the destination system.

Path Cost displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.

Adjacency Reference List Number contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.

Adjacencies displays all adjacencies to neighbours via Ethernet or DCC.

Linkage ID (only in case of a DCC adjacency) displays the internal ID number of the linkage.

Adjacency ID displays the internal ID number of the adjacency.

Neighbour SNPA (only in case of an Ethernet adjacency) displays the MAC address of the neighbour.

Neighbour System Type displays the Level 2 or Level 1 system type.

Neighbour System IDs

Displays the System IDs of the neighbour.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 305

28.2 MCF CLNS Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...

This window is used for displaying MCF CLNS performance information.

The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the readability.

IS-IS Level 1 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 1 routing.


306 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Display Meaning

Raised The level 1 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is disturbed.

Cleared No overload

IS-IS Level 2 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 2 routing.

Display Meaning

Raised The level 2 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is disturbed.

Cleared No overload

Assembling Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to reassembly time expiry.

Congestion Discards

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.

Error Reports Received

Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.

Area Addresses Ignored

Displays the number of the manual area addresses dropped from the NE’s area, because the maximum number of area addresses inside the NE is reached.

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 307

Other PDUs Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except congestion.

Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for any reason except reassembly time expiry.

Segments Received

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs received.

Segments Sent

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing occurs.

Upload Dump DB...

Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.

Upload Config Parameters...

Opens a standard Save window to store configuration parameters in the ConfigParameters.log file.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 309

29 MCF DCC

29.1 MCF DCC Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...

In this window, you can create various connections between DCC channels and the VC-4 ports.

DCC List

The list contains 5 DCC channels and displays its connection state.

Display Meaning

OSI DCC Channel OSI DCC channel name

IP DCC Device IP DCC channel name

DCCM/DCCR Port <DCCM or DCCR type>_<slot number>.<port>

Connection State Possible values: DCCM; DCCR; free

Linkage State Possible values: Enabled / Disabled


310 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

New DCC Cross Connection

Set the type of DCC cross connection and select the MS/RS port from the Port List.

How to Configure DCC Cross Connections

Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 311

29.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

Fixed routes to other routing domains, called Reachable Address Prefixes, can be created and deleted here.

Configuration:

Traffic Mode

Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.

External Domain

Possible settings: Yes or No

yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other NE’s.

no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).

Level 1 Default Metric [1..63]

Cost for DCC channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).


312 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Default = 1


Cost for DCC channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.


Default = 1

T200 Time [200...2500 ms]

Value range: 200...2500 ms

Interface Type

Setting the interface for the local and remote NE. For a successful connection, the one NE must be set on Network and the other one to User.

Line Code

Displays the NRZ line code.

MCF Linkage State

Displays, whether the connection can be used (enabled) or not (disabled).

Note:

In Active NE state, it may be necessary to click Apply after every single parameter change.

The Add... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Add window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Modify window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 313

29.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Address Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max. Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Area Mismatch

If an adjacency cannot be initialized between two Level 1 ISs because of non-divisibility of a common range address, the value of this Area Mismatch is increased.


314 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Octets Received


Octets Sent


Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 315

29.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).

Configuration

Address Prefix

The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this DCC linkage" (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)

- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed. - Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of another one.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible. If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be one.


316 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g. different network providers).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 317

29.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...


Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this DCC linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode." (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)


Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type




318 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

29.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections

MSOH CPs in each Termination Point:

DCCM [combined CP for bytes (6,1,1), (6,4,1), (6,7,1), (7,1,1), (7,4,1), (7,7,1), (8,1,1), (8,4,1) and (8,7,1)]

HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1) and (5,8,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,5,1), (7,6,1) and (7,8,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1) and (8,3,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,5,1), (8,6,1) and (8,8,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,9,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]

HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1), (7,2,1) and (7,3,1)] HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]

HCOC27 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1), (5,8,1), (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1),(7,2,1), (7,3,1), (7,5,1), (7,6,1), (7,8,1), (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,2,1), (9,3,1), (9,4,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]

MCF DCC Configuration


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 319

30 MCF Ethernet

30.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.

SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry (SNPA = MAC address).

Click Delete to clear existing addresses.

Configuration:

Traffic Mode

Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.

External Domain

Possible settings: No or Yes


no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."

L1/L2 Intermediate System Priority [1...127]


320 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Priority of the system for being selected as the designated IS on the sub network.

Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]

Cost for Ethernet channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.


Default = 1


Cost for Ethernet channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.


Default = 1

MAC Ethernet Address

Displays the MAC address used by the NE for this Ethernet linkage". (Hint: the MAC address is not configurable in the hiT70xx system).

MCF Linkage State

Linkage state is displayed.

The Add... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Add window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Modify window.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 321

30.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency


Version Skew




Max. Area Addresses Mismatch


Octets Received


Octets Sent



322 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Frames Received


Frames Sent



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 323

30.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...


Configuration:

Address Prefix


Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.




Default Metric Type


The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.


324 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be one.


SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 325

30.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode.



Default Metric Type



SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 327

31 MCF OSI/IP

31.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / IP over OSI -> Configuration...

This window contains a checkbox for activating the tunneling and displays the Remote Tunnel NSAP and the Assigned IP Pseudo Interface.


328 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

31.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)

Configuration:

Activate Tunnel

Setting the checkbox for tunnel activation.

External Domain

Possible settings: No or Yes


no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."

Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]

Cost for channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 329

Default = 1


Cost for channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.


Default = 1

Source IP Address

This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.

Destination IP Address

This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.

MCF Linkage State

Linkage state is displayed.

The Add... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Add window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Modify window.



330 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

31.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency


Version Skew




Max. Area Address Mismatch


Octets Received


Octets Sent



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 331

Frames Received


Frames Sent



332 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

31.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... -> Add...


Configuration

Address Prefix


Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)




Default Metric Type


The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 333

If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be one.



334 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

31.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... -> (with an entry selected in the Reachable Addresses list) -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode." (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)



Default Metric Type




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 335

32 IP Settings

32.1 IP Addresses Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...

This window allows to configure the IP addresses for each DCN interface within the SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column Description

Index Unique identifier of the interface.

This index must be used also for identification of unnumbered links in OSPF configuration.

(Identifier = SNMP-index)

Interface Interface name.

Possible Interface names are :

eth0: for Ethernet Interface (unnumbered index 2)


336 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

lo:0: for Local loopback interface (unnumbered index 1)

dcc: Point-to-point interface over DCCM or DCCR. Each device could be configured as numbered or unnumbered interface

IP Address The local IP address of the interface.

The default value for the interface is 0.0.0.0 in this case the interface is not configured.

Once a local loopback address has been defined in the SURPASS hiT 7070, it is not possible any more to reset a configured IP address back to 0.0.0.0. If the address 0.0.0.0 is assigned, the NE assigns the address of lo:0 to this device. If the IP address of an interface is equal to the address of the local loopback interface lo:0 this interface is treated as unnumbered interface. If the IP address is not equal to the address of lo:0 or to the address of any other interface this interface is called a numbered interface. Every time that the operator tries to disable an IP interface by configuring its IP address to 0.0.0.0, the local loopback IP address will be set.

+ to disable IP on the interface set this interface to OSI only, using the "Linkage Config" window.

For Ethernet interface: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF -> Ethernet -> Configuration, then select OSI.

For DCC interfaces: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF -> DCC, then select a DCC interface and press the right-hand-mouse button, select "Configuration", then select OSI.

Subnet Mask Subnet mask associated with the IP address of this interface.

It defines the network that this interface belongs to. If OSPF is enabled on this interface the subnet mask has to be the same as set for the connected peer interface(s).

Dest IP Address The destination IP address of the interface referenced by the Index.

For the Ethernet interface the destination has to be the same as the source. For DCC links normally it is not necessary to enter any data in this field. The destination address will be learned via PPP protocol.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 337

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Addresses Entry Modify window.


338 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

32.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify a selected entry in the IP Addresses Config table.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 339

32.3 IP Static Routing Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing...

This window shows all the IP routes known by the SURPASS hiT 7070 and also allows to configure static routes manually.

Each known route has one entry (row) in the table. For each known route the following information is shown:

Column Description

Destination Destination IP address of this route.

Warning: The networks 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 are reserved for internal purposes and should never be entered in this table.

Interface Name of the local interface through which the next hop of this route should be reached.

Metric [0..32766] Primary routing metric for this route.

Next Hop IP address of the next hop of this route.

Type Type of the route:

Direct


340 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The destination IP address is directly connected to the SURPASS hiT 7070 via the interface named in the "interface" column.

Indirect The destination IP address is reachable via the Next Hop IP address.

Invalid removes the route from the active routing process.

Protocol Routing mechanism via which this route was learned.

Mask Mask to be logically AND-ed with the destination address, before being compared to the value in the Destination field.

Add...

Opens the IP Static Routing Entry Add window.

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Static Routing Entry Modify window.

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

On deletion, the route will be first set to "Invalid" type.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 341

32.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the IP Static Routing Config table.


342 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

32.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the IP Static Routing Config table.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 343

33 OSPF Settings

33.1 OSPF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...

This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router" from now on).

OSPF Router ID

Identifier of the router (SURPASS hiT 7070) in the Autonomous System. The initial value is the IP Ethernet interface address of the router.

Enabled OSPF

The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.

Note: Clicking Enabled OSPF returns "enabled" only if the OSPF Router ID is set and if at least one interface is configured with an area. In all other cases, "disabled" will be returned.


344 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Autonomous System Border Router

Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR). ASBRs propagate default routes only when these are entered.

Area Border Router

Indication whether this router is an area border router.

Information Fields:

External Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements, which are currently stored in the link-state database.

Originated New Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this router.

Received New Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of link-state advertisements received, determined to be new instantiations.

External LSA Checksum Summary

Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in the link-state database.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 345

33.2 OSPF Areas Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 ("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.

Column Description

Area Unique identifier of an area.

LSA Import Import mode selection for LSAs (Link State Advertisements). Used to configure stub areas.

SPF Runs The number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using this area's link state database.

Link State Advertisement (LSA)

This is an information field: displays the number of Link State Advertisements.

LSA Checksum Summary

This is an information field: displays the sum of the LSA link-state checksums contained in the link-state database of this area.

Area Summary Control of the import of summary LSAs into stub areas.


346 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.

Note:

No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the OSPF areas known.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 347

33.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.


348 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Metric.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 349

33.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Aggregates...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Aggregates.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is the OSPF Configuration .

Column Description

Area Area in which the Area Aggregate is to be found.

LSDB Type Type of the Area Aggregate.

Net Address The IP address of the network or sub-network indicated by the range.

Net Mask The sub-network mask that pertains to the network or sub-network.

Effect Sub-networks subsumed by ranges either trigger the advertisement of the indicated aggregate (advertise matching), or result in the sub-network not being


350 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

advertised at all outside the area.

Add...

Opens the OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add window.

Delete


Note:

Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 351

33.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Aggregates... -> Add..

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.


352 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the OSPF Configuration

Column Description

Index Unique identifier of this interface. This is the index defined in the IP Address Table.

IP Address IP address of this interface.

State OSPF interface state: possible types are

For Ethernet Interface: Designated Router, Backup Designated Router Other Designated Router

For DCC Interfaces, Point to Point (PtP)

Events Number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 353

Administrative State Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled / Disabled).

Area Unique identifier of the area to which the interface connects.

Type OSPF interface type:

Broadcast (Ethernet interfaces). Point-to-Point (DCC interfaces)

The Loopback interface reads "unknown" in this table.

Designated Router IP address of the designated router in the LAN, if applicable.

Backup Designated Router

IP address of the backup designated router in the LAN, if applicable.

Router Priority [0..255] Priority of this interface for becoming Designated Router. Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming Designated Router.

Transit Delay [0..3600 s]

Estimated number of seconds to transmit a link-state update packet over this interface.

Retransmission Interval [0..3600 s]

Number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.

Hello Interval [1..65535 s]

Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.

Timeout [1..65535 s] Timeout interval.

Password Type Type of the password.

Password Password entry.

Add...

Opens the OSPF Interfaces Entry Add window

Delete


Note:

No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.


354 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.8 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.

Notes:

To add an unnumbered interface, select the index number of the interface defined in the IP Address table. The interface will then be identified with the Loopback address. The IP Address field is grayed out.

The IP address of the interface lo:0 and all unnumbered interface will only be advertised, if OSPF is enabled on lo:0. The fields that are left blank in this window, will automatically be configured to the default values:


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 355

Area Backbone Area

Router Priority 1

Transit Delay 1

Retransmission Interval 5

Hello Interval 10

Timeout 40

Password none


356 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.9 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Interface Metric.

Column Description

IP Address IP address of this OSPF interface.

Index Unique identifier of the interface to which this entry is applicable (see IP Address Table).

Metric Value [0..65535] Metric on this interface.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 357

33.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Virtual Interfaces.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is the OSPF Configuration .

Note:

If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.

Column Description

Area Transit area that the Virtual Link traverses.

Virtual Neighbour Router ID of the Virtual Neighbour.

State OSPF virtual interface state.

Events Number of state changes or error events on this Virtual Link.


358 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Transit Delay [0..3600 s]

Estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link-state update packet over this interface.

Retransmission Interval [0..3600 s]

Number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.

Hello Interval [1..65535 s]

Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.

Timeout [1.. 2147483647 s]

Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Password Type Type of the password.

Password Password entry.

Add...

Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add window.

Note:

Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40 s, so it has to be changed manually.

The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Delete


Note: No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 359

33.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Interfaces... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.


360 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.12 OSPF Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there is one entry (row) in this table.

Column Description

IP Address IP address of this neighbour.

Index On an interface having an IP address: zero.

On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding value of the Index in the Internet Standard MIB.

Neighbour Router ID Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the Autonomous System.

LSA Import LSA import state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service Routing

Type-of-Service Routing state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).

Neighbour Priority [0..255]

Priority of this neighbour in the designated router selection algorithm.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 361

State State of the relationship with this neighbour.

Events Number of times this neighbour relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.

Retransmission Queue Length

Current length of the retransmission queue.


362 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF Virtual Neighbours.

Note:

If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.

Column Description

Area Transit area identifier.

IP Address IP address of this virtual neighbour.

Virtual Neighbour Router ID

Unique identifier of the virtual neighbour router.

LSA Import LSA import state with this virtual neighbour (OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service Routing

Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual neighbour (OFF/ON).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 363

State State of the relationship with this virtual neighbour.

Events Number of times this virtual neighbour relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.

Retransmission Queue Length

Current length of the retransmission queue.

Hello Suppressed Indicator whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbour.

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details window.


364 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.14 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Neighbours... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info list.

Notes:

The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40 s, so it has to be changed manually.

Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 365

33.15 OSPF LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...

This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070. For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.

Column Description

Area Identifier of the Area from which the LSA was received.

Type Type of the Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating router in the Autonomous System.

Sequence Sequence number.

Age [s] Age of the link state advertisement in seconds.

Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, excepting the age field.

Link State Advertisement (LSA)

Number of Link State Advertisements.


366 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 367

33.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.


368 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.17 OSPF External LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...

This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column Description

Type Type of the external Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

Ext LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating external router.

Sequence Sequence number.

Age [s] Age of the external link state advertisement in seconds.

Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, excepting the Age field.

Ext Link State Advertisement

Number of external Link State Advertisements.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 369

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details window


370 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

33.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info list.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 371

34 TCP Settings

34.1 TCP Connections Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections...

This window displays information about the listening TCP ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 and all the currently established TCP connections.

There is one row in this table for each open TCP port in the SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column Description

State State of this TCP port: Port is in Listening mode or a TCP connection is established.

Local Address Local IP address for this TCP connection.

Local Port Local port number for this TCP connection.

Remote Address Remote IP address for this TCP connection.

Remote Port Remote port number for this TCP connection.


372 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the TCP Connections Entry Details window.

Notes:

All ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 are displayed in this table, including the ports used internally.

The TCP connections which are established with TNMS systems (for management) can also be displayed via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport connections -> Information....

Here the IP connections can be identified by a 17-byte NSAP-like address which starts with "54" and contains the IP address, e.g. 540072872203XXXXXXXXXXXX0100001.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 373

34.2 TCP Connections Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the TCP Connections Info list.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 375

35 Data

35.1 Subrack Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the Subrack symbol -> Subrack Data...

Customer Specific tab:

In the Customer Specific tab, the customer can enter specific inventory data of the subrack. Value range: 0...128 characters

Vendor Specific tab:

The Vendor Specific tab is read-only, displaying vendor specific inventory data of the subrack.


376 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

35.2 ASIC Data Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -> Information -> ASIC Data...

This window gives information about the ASIC(s) on the card.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 377

35.3 Copy Data

This window is accessible via the port connections (after clicking the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card in the Module View), by using the context menu of a symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)

With this window, you can transfer alarm and data configurations of a AU4 or VCn to one or more other objects of the same type, i.e. either from one card to another or object configurations within the same card

Note:

Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping of the subrack).

Copy Items

This area allows to select the configuration types to be copied:


378 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Alarm configurations

Traffic configurations (not with AU4 traffic flow symbols)

Performance configurations (not with E12 and E3 traffic flow symbols)

Copy Units

This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one target must be selected. To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.

Copy Card Data

How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 379

35.4 Copy Card Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol (except SCOH and CLU) -> Copy Card Data...

This window allows to transfer data configurations of a card to one or more other empty equivalent slots.

Note:

Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

Copy Units

This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one target must be selected. To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.

Copy Data

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object


380 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

35.5 DB Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...

In this window, you can configure DB management (VCDB) settings.

The VCDB contains the complete configuration data for the NE, stored in the SCOH drawer in a non-volatile memory.

You can save the current VCDB for future use, by uploading it to the LCT/NCT or OS. You can revert to that VCDB by downloading it from the LCT/NCT or OS, e. g. in case of a card/software change or failure.

NE State

The NE State can be set to Active or Idle.

Active Config DB:

Configuration ID

Wrap-around counter which is increased on each persistent configuration change.

Config DB Action

Possible Settings:


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 381

NE State Config DB Action

Active no

Idle no

Set to Default Config DB

Set to Previous Config DB

How to Download VCDB Files


382 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

35.6 DB Download Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Config DB Management... (with NE State set to "idle") -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -> Open.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

Note: A stop of the download will cause a SCOH reboot, which does not affect the traffic.

How to Download VCDB Files


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 383

35.7 DB Upload Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Config DB Management... -> Upload... -> (in the opened window, enter the file name) -> Save.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB upload process.

By pressing the Start button, the upload process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the upload process can be terminated.

Note:

In case of DB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if configured to Empty before.

How to Upload VCDB Files


384 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

35.8 NE Logs Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Logs... -> NE Logs...

Configuration Log tab:

The list contains one entry for each single configuration change.

Click the column header to sort the column.

If an list entry is selected, the Show Details... button opens the Log Records Attribute window.

Historical Event Log tab:

The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single alarm of the requested historical event log.

Click the column header to sort the column.

Both NE logs can be saved using the Save button in the tool bar

or via the File -> Save as... command in the Main Menu.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 385

35.9 Log Records Attribute

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Logs... -> NE Logs... (in the NE Logs Info window, Configuration Log tab, select an object) -> Show Details...

This window displays details of the selected object.


386 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

35.10 Copy to Permanent MACs

A very quick copy process window appears.

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... -> Learned MACs tab -> Copy to Permanent button

This window shows the progress bar, symbolizing the copying process from the Learned MACs list to the Permanent MACs list.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 387

36 Performance

36.1 Ethernet Packet Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Performance -> Packets...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.


388 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Value Date, time, TMP and frames of the current interval

Current 15min Corresponding entries

Current 24h Corresponding entries

Tx Incoming ETH traffic

Rx Outgoing ETH traffic

TMP Elapsed time in the interval.

Lost Frames Queue Overflow Rx If the flow control is disabled and the input traffic exceeds the VC capacity or the value of the admission control, there will be lost frames. So the corrupt frames are counted.

Multicast Frames Pause frames which are triggered by the flow control, are counted as well.

Bad Frames CrC Error Rx Corrupted frames which enter the port.

Dropped Frames Tx Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the following reasons: The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel mode, or vice versa. The GFP Assignment ID (Extension header) is wrong. Frames coming from SDH side are corrupted because of signal degrade.

Invalid VLAN or Untagged Frames (in case of IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E in VLAN modes) Frames received at the gigabit port in downstream direction tagged with a VLAN ID not assigned (unknown) to any downlink GFP channel or that are untagged.

Note: To see the current state, you need to push the Update button.

Previous 15 min tab:

The tab contains packet statistics, which were obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry.

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 389

Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains packet statistics that were obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry. 15 min intervals are also contained in the list.




390 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

36.2 AU4 PJE Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Performance -> AU4 PJE...

This window contains a tab control with three cards: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:



Current

The rows in this field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when AU4 performance monitoring is enabled. If AU4 performance monitoring is disabled, the current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval

Time Time of the current interval

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 391

-PJE The negative pointer actions are counted

+PJE The positive pointer actions are counted


The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 15 min and 24 h interval. The last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entry.

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values


Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 24 h (also 15 min) interval. The last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entries. 15 min intervals are also contained in the list.




392 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

36.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-64 -> Performance -> OS Near End Gauge...


Current tab:


This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 393

Enable TCA Monitoring

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Avg. BER Average BER of the current interval

Max. BER Maximal BER within the current interval

Available Time Time within the current interval

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h:

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper threshold or Lower threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always


394 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.




The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:


Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 395

36.4 MSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Near End...


Current tab:








396 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately



In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current


Display Meaning




BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 397

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.




398 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619




Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:


Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h


Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 399

36.5 MSTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Far End...


Current tab:








400 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619






Current


Display Meaning






SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 401

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%



Monitoring enabled




TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT





402 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619




Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:



Previous 24 h


Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 403

36.6 RSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> RS Near End...


Current tab:








404 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619






Current


Display Meaning






SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 405

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%



Monitoring enabled




TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT





406 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h


Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:

Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h


Previous 24 h


Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 407

36.7 VCCTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Performance -> Near End...


The errors/defects which are detected from the CTP of its own.

Current tab:




Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.


408 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619









Current


Display Meaning






SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 409


Monitoring enabled




TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT







Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:



410 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


Previous 24 h


Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 411

36.8 VCCTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Performance -> Far End...


The errors/defects which are detected from the far NE and send via G1/V5 byte.

Current tab:




Note:



412 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals.





The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.



Current


Display Meaning









A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 413


Monitoring enabled




TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT







Previous 15 min



414 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Previous 24 h tab:



Previous 24 h


Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 415

36.9 VCTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Near End...


Current tab:




Note:




416 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619








Current


Display Meaning









A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 417


Monitoring enabled




TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT







Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:




418 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Previous 24 h


Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 419

36.10 VCTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Far End...


Current tab:




Note:




420 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619








Current


Display Meaning









A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 421


Monitoring enabled




TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark grey color.






Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:




422 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Previous 24 h


Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 423

36.11 VC12 Near End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -> VC12 -> Performance... -> Near End...


Current tab:







424 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619







Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection:

Display Meaning









Monitoring enabled



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 425



TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT







Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:



Previous 24 h



426 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 427

36.12 VC12 Far End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -> VC12 -> Performance... -> Far End...


Current tab:







428 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619







Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection:

Display Meaning






SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.



Monitoring enabled



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 429



TCA 15 min


TCA 24 h


TCA UAT







Previous 15 min


Previous 24 h tab:



Previous 24 h



430 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 431

36.13 GFP Frames Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> GFP Group #n -> Performance -> GFP Frames...


Current tab:




432 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval

Time Time of the current interval

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)

Dropped Frames Tx Discarded downstream frames due to queue overflow. (i.e. tagged ethernet downstream on gigabit uplink exceeding its assigned VC capacity) One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained GFP channels.

Dropped Frames Rx Transferred downstream ethernet frames from gigabit uplink towards assigned downlink VC. One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained GFP channels.

Average Throughput Rx [bytes/s]

Average throughput of transferred downstream bytes of ethernet frames in the passed measuring interval.


The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry.



Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry. 15 min intervals are also contained in the list.




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 433

37 IF7FE2GEL2 card

37.1 IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config

L2 Switch tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select L2 Switch tab).

General

System MAC address

Burned-In MAC Address in Hexadecimal Format


434 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Tunneling MAC Address

The Tunneling Mac Address used for Trasparent Transport Of Customer BPDUs.

Aging Timeout

The FDB entry's address aging timeout (in seconds).

Tag Protocol Interface

Enable protocol identifier selection, the value indicates that the frame carries the protocol tag information

Rate Mode

********

GARP

Enable GVRP

The administrative status requested by management for GVRP. The value enabled (1) indicates that GVRP should be enabled on this device, on all ports for which it has not been specifically disabled. When disabled (2), GVRP is disabled on all ports and all GVRP packets will be forwarded transparently.

1: Checked

2: Unchecked

Enable GMRP

The administrative status requested by management for GMRP. The value enabled(1) indicates that GMRP should be enabled on this device, in all VLANs, on all ports for which it has not been specifically disabled. When disabled(2), GMRP is disabled, in all VLANs, on all ports and all GMRP packets will be forwarded transparently.

1: Checked

2: Unchecked


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 435

Broadcast tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Broadcast tab).

Broadcast mode

The item allows to disable or to enable three different broadcast storm recovery modes

- no broadcast storm (NoBS)

- Switch wide broadcast storm control (SwW)

- Per port broadcast storm control (PBS)


436 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

- Per port bandwith policing (PBwP)

Switch Wide Limit

This item store the limit to be used switch wide (i.e. on all the ports)

Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in 64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)

Broadcast ID/ Policing ID

This object represents an istance out of 8 policing values in this table

Broadcast Storm Rate / Policing rate

This table store committed broadcast storm rate value over witch the exceeding broadcast packets are discarded. This table store committed policing rate values. This is the sstained rate permitted by policing.

Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in 64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 437

STP tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select STP tab).

Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled

Spanning tree operational status on the switch.

1: Checked / Enabled

2: Unchecked / Disabled

Force Version

The MST configuration force protocol version.


438 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

1: STP

2: Rapid STP

3: Multi STP

MST Region Name

The MST configuration name of at most 32 characters.

Revision

The MST configuration revision. The default value is 1.

Digest Key

The MST configuration digest key.

Value as Hexadecimal.

Format Selector

The MST configuration format selector. A value different from 0 (zero) indicates non-support for the IEEE 802.1s standard is not supported.

The MST tab is only available when the Force Version has the value Multi STP

If the Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled is enable and the user wants to change the Force Version, then a Warning message "For Configuring the STP Force Version you must disable STP Globally Enabled first!" will be shown.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 439

CST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select CST tab).

CONFIG

Bridge Hello Time [1..10 s]

The MSTP bridge hello time for the CIST. The default value is 2.

Bridge Forward Delay [4..30 s]

The MSTP bridge forward delay for the CIST. The default value is 15.

Bridge Max Age


440 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The MSTP bridge max age for the CIST.

Rules:

2 * (BHT + 1) <= BMA <= 2 * (BFD - 1)

BHT - Bridge Hello Time

BMA - Bridge Max Age

BFD - Bridge Forward Delay

Bridge Priority

The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The recommended default value is 32768.

0 | 4096 | 8192 | 12288 | 16384 | 20480 | 24576 | 28672 | 32768 | 36864 | 40960 | 45056 | 49152 | 53248 | 57344 | 61440

Status

Max Age [s]

The MSTP root port max age for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.

Forward Delay [s]

The MSTP root port forward delay for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.

Hello Time [s]

The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of hundredths of a second.

Bridge Hold Time [s]

The MSTP bridge hold time for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.

CST Regional Root ID

The MSTP regional root identifier for the CIST.

Hexadecimal format.

Regional Root Path Cost

The MSTP regional root path cost for the CIST.

Bridge ID

The MSTP bridge identifier for this CIST.

Hexadecimal format.

Time Since Topology Change

The MSTP time since the last topology change for this CIST.

It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

Topology Change Count

The MSTP count of topology changes for this CIST.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 441

Topology Change Parameter

The MSTP topology change parameter for this CIST.

1: True

2: False

Root Port ID

The MSTP root port ID for this CIST.

Hexadecimal format.

Designated Root ID

The MSTP designated root bridge identifier for this CIST.

Hexadecimal format.

Root Path Cost

The MSTP root path cost for this CIST.


442 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

MST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab).

MST ID [1..4094]

The MSTP instance ID.

Range: 1..4094

Bridge Priority [0.61440]

The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The recommended default value is 32768.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 443

Bridge ID

The MSTP bridge identifier in a specific instance.

Hexadecimal Value

Designated Root ID

The MSTP designated root bridge identifier.

Hexadecimal Value.

Root Path Cost

The MSTP root path cost.

Value as delivered.

Root Port ID

The MSTP root port ID.

Hexadecimal Value.

Time Since Topology Change

The MSTP time since the last topology change.


Topology Change Count

The MSTP count of topology changes.

Topology Change Parameter

The MSTP topology change parameter.

Value

1: True

2: False

VLANs

The NSTP VLAN-IDs list.

String with the VLAN-IDs separated by ";"

Buttons Function

Add…

Opens the MST Entry Add window.

Modify

Only visible if an entry in the MST Grid is selected.

Delete

Only visible if an entry in the MST Table is selected. Deletes the selected Entry.


444 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Opens the message box "Delete selected MST Entry?" on delete.

IGMP Snooping tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select IGMP Snooping tab).

IGMP Snooping Enabled

This enables or disables IGMP Snooping on the system. Default values is disabled

1: Checked /Enabled


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 445


Interval

IGMP group interval time on the system. This is time that the switch will wait before deleting the interface from the entry because it do not receive a report from a particular interface. Default value is 260s. Range 1:3600

Max Response Time

It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max response time for the system. The max response time is the time that the switch will wait after sending a query in an interface because it does not receive a report from a particular group in that interface. Default value is 10s . Range 1:3600

Expiration time

It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max expiration time. It is the time that the switch will wait for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed from the list of the interface with a multicast routers attached. Default value is 0s. Range 0:3600

Multicast Control Frames Processed

Multicast Control Frames Processed by the CPU. The number of multicast control frames that have been processed by the CPU

Port IGMP Snooping Disabled

Shows all available Ports configured in this card.

Port IGMP Snooping Enabled

LCT / OS can configure the IGMP Snooping operation per port. The value enable indicates that IGMP Snooping is enable on this port in all VLAs . A value disable indicates that IGMP Snooping is disabled on the port in all VLANs.

Show the selected Available Ports. Multiple selection supported.


446 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

COS tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select COS tab).

User Priority

The default ingress User Priority for this port.

A table that contains information about the 802.1p prioeity mapping to traffic class priority queue for every physical port.

User Priority [0..7]

Traffic Class [0..3]


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 447

Traffic class priority queue the received frame is mapped to.

VLAN Translation tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Translation tab).

VLAN Change Mode

The item allows to disable or to enable such different VLAN change modes

No Change (NoCh)


448 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Per VLANID change (Vch)

Per port change (Pch)

Per port and per VLAN ID change (PVCh)

VLAN ID

The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.

Egress VLAN Id

The set of ports which are permanently assigned to the egress list for this VLAN by management.

VLAN Priority tab


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 449

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority tab).

VLAN ID


VLAN Mode

It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure the mode of operation for a VLAN Id.

Trap tab


450 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Trap tab).

Link Up/Down

Link Up/Link Down traps for the entire switch.

values

1: Checked

2: Unchecked

Spanning Tree

This flag enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.

values

1: Checked

2: Unchecked


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 451

Mirroring tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Mirroring tab).

Mirroring Mode

Port mirroring mode:

Enable : enable mirroring mode

Disable : disable mirroring mode

Delete : clear mirrored port and probe


452 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Port configuration : shows the probe port

Probe Port

Shows the probe port

Mirrored Port

Shows the mirrored port.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 453

37.2 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> Add push-button.

MST ID

The MSTP instance ID

Range: 1..4094

VLANs

Available

Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created as a result of GVRP requests received.

Multiple selection supported.

Selected


Note

The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.


454 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch Tab, this window closes.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 455

37.3 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> select on entry -> Modify push-button.

MST ID


Range: 1..4094

VLANs

Available

Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created as a result of GVRP requests received.


Selected


Note

The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.


456 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch Tab, this window closes.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 457

37.4 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> Add push-button.

Priority ID

It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode configured per VLAN

Priority In Pri Based

The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority

Priority Tos Based

The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority

Priority VLAN In Based

The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different value based on Priority Mode


458 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.5 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> select an entry row -> Modify push-button.


The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port.

Priority ID

It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode configured per VLAN

Priority In Pri Based

The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority

Priority Tos Based

The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority

Priority VLAN In Based

The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different value based on Priority Mode


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 459

Status

The status of Vlan Priority Map Entry


460 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.6 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config

Permanent MAC’s tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Permanent MACs tab).

PERMANENT MACS

The switch’s static Mac filtering table

VLAN ID

The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.

MAC Address

The Static MAC Filter MAC address.

Destination Port Names

The Static MAC Filter destination port mask.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 461

Learned MAC’s tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Learned MACs tab).

Learned MACs

The Multicast Forwarding Database Table.

VLAN ID

Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.

Value as Delivered.

MAC Address

A unicast MAC address for which the device has forwarding and/or filtering information.

Port Name

Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.

String with the port name or "0".

Status

The status of this entry.


462 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

1: Other

2: Invalid

3: Learned

4: Self

5: Mgmt


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 463

37.7 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> Add push-button.

VLAN ID

The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.

MAC Address


Destination Ports

Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.

Note:

The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC Address! The first byte of the Adress must be even for Unicast Addresses."


464 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.8 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.

VLAN ID

The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.

Destination Ports



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 465

37.9 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config

Permanent MACs tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Permanent MACs tab.

PERMANENT MACS

The switch's static Mac filtering table

VLAN ID


Value as Delivered.

MAC Address

A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information.

Destination Port



466 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Registered MACs tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Registered MACs tab.

Registered MACs

The Multicast Forwarding Database table

VLAN ID


MAC Address

A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.

Protocol

The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.

1: Static

2: GMRP

3: IGMP

Type

This displays the type of the entry.

1: Static

2: Dinamic


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 467

Description

Text description of this multicast table entry.

Forward Ports

BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be forwarded.

Filter Ports

BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be filtered.


468 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.10 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: : Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Add push-button.

VLAN ID


MAC Address


Destination Ports

Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.

Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.

When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.


Note:

The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 469

37.11 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.

VLAN ID


Destination Ports

Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.

Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.

When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.


Note:

The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."


470 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.12 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports...

A list of interface entries.

Port Name

A unique value for each interface.

MAC Address

A Multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.

Administrative Status

The desired state of the interface.

1: Up

2: Down

3: Testing

Operational Status

The current operational state of the interface.

1: Up

2: Down

3: Testing


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 471




472 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.13 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config

General tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> General tab.

GENERAL

802.3ad LACP Mode

Enable/disable 802.3ad LACP on this port.

Values

1: Checked

2: Unchecked

Administrative Mode

The switch's Port Admin Mode.

Local Ports:

1: Checked

2: Unchecked

Logical Ports:

1: Enabled


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 473

2: Disabled

Auto-Negotiation

This object identifies the administration status of auto negotiation for this port.

Freeze MAC Address Learning

Manager can freeze all the dynamically learned MAC addresses assocated to a port, and stop the learning mode on this port.

1: Freeze

2: Unfreeze

Double VLAN Tag Mode

Controls the Double Vlan Tag mode on this port.

1: Checked

2: Unchecked

Double VLAN Tag Customer ID [0..4095]

Configures the Customer ID for the Double Vlan Tag for this port.

Range: 0..4095

Maximum Frame Size

This object identifies the largest value that can be configured for agentPortMaxFrameSize.

Enable Maximum Frame Size

This object identifies the currently configured maximum frame size value for this port. The maximum value that this object can be set to is the value of agentPortMaxFrameSizeLimit.


474 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

VLAN tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> VLAN tab.

VLAN



Range: 2..4094

Acceptable Frames Filtering

When this is admitOnlyVlanTagged (2) the device will discard untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When admitAll(1), untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.

1: Admit all

2: Admit only VLAN tagged

Default User Priority [0..7]

The default ingress User Priority for this port.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 475

GVRP/GMRP tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> GVRP/GMRP tab.

GVRP/GMRP

GVRP Port Status

The administrative state of GMRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that GMRP is enabled on this port in all VLANs as long as dot1dGmrpStatus is also enabled (1). A value of disabled(2) indicates that GMRP is disabled on this port in all VLANs: any GMRP packet received will be silently discarded and no GMRP registrations will be propagated from other ports.

1: Checked

2: Unchecked

GMRP Port Status

The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as dot1qGvrpStatus is also enabled for this device. When disabled (2) but dot1qGvrpStatus is still enabled for the device, GVRP is disabled on this port:

1: Checked

2: Unchecked

GARP TIMERS

Join Time [1..100 cs]


476 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

A table of GARP control information about every bridge port.

Range: 1..100

Leave Time [20..600 cs]

The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds.

Range: 20..600

Leave All Time [200..6000 cs]

The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds.

Range: 200..6000

STP tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> STP tab.

STP

STP Port State

The administrative STP state for the port.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 477

The default port STP state is enabled for the first 4095 ports and disabled for any ports beyond.

1: Checked / Enabled


Port Up Time Since Counter were Cleared

Time since port was reset. It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

Note: For a correct handling of LAG, the STP should be enabled on the involved ports.

CST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> CST tab.

CONFIG

Edge State

The administrative state of a specific port in CIST.

1: Checked

2: Unchecked.


478 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The default port state is disabled.

Port Priority [0..240]

The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.

The default value is 128.

Range: 1..240

Port Path Cost [0..200000000]

The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.

Range: 0..200000000

STATUS

Operation Status of Edge Port

The MSTP operational status of a specific port for the CIST.

1: Enable

2: Disable

Is Part of P2P Link

The MSTP operational point to point mac of a specific port for the CIST.

1: True

2: False

Port ID

The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in CIST.

Port Forwarding State

The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.

1: Discarding

2: Learning

3: Forwarding

4: Disabled

5: Manual Fwd

6: Not Participate

Designated Bridge ID

The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in CIST.

Designated Port ID

The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in CIST.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 479

Designated Cost

The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in CIST.

Topology Changing

The MSTP topology change acknowledge for a specific port in the CIST.

1: True

2: False

Port Role

The STP port role.

MST tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> MST tab.

MST ID [1..4094]


Port Priority [0..240]

The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.


480 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

The default value is 128.

Range: 1..240

Port Path Cost [0..200000000]

The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.

Range: 0..200000000

Port ID

The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in a specific instance.

Value as Delivered.

Port Forwarding State

The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.

1: Discarding

2: Learning

3: Forwarding

4: Disabled

5: Manual Fwd

6: Not Participate

Designated Bridge ID

The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in a specific instance.

Designated Port ID

The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in a specific instance.

Designated Cost

The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in a specific instance.

Port Role

The STP port role.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 481

Policing tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Policing tab.

Policing

This item indicates the status of the port policing control that can be:

1: checked / enabled

2: unchecked /disabled

Broadcast Limit /Policing CIR

This specifies the bandwith limit of the indexed port, over which the broadcast packets are discarded.


482 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Tunnelling tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Tunnelling tab.

Network Interface Mode

The Switch's Port is configured either in UNI or NNI Mode.

1: User to Network Interface

2: Network to Network Interface

BPDU Tunneling

The switch's Port is configured for BPDU Tunneling.

1: Tunneling

2: No Tunneling

This Box is deactivated if the Port is Configured in UNI mode.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 483

VLAN Translation tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> VLAN Translation tab.

Egress VLAN ID

The item represents an egress vlan Id that replaces the incoming vlan Id on the incoming port. This table is significant if Vlan Change Mode is equal to "Per port change" . It store the out Vlan ID Tag that translate the ingress tags received on the port Id.

Incoming Vlan Id

It represents an istance of incoming Vlan Id.


484 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Egress QoS tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Egress QoS tab.

Number of Egress Traffic Classes

The number of egress traffic classes supported on this port.

A table of Queueing Mode parameters.

Queue ID

The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.

Queueing Mode

The queue mode to be set or get for the specified queue.

1: Disabled

2: Strict Priority Queueing

3: Weighted Fair Queueing

Queueing Weight Factor

Weight Factor is a 16 bit value which limits total bandwidth that a queue occupies in case of congestion.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 485

Deficit Count

The deficit count for the queue, a 21 bit value which is reduced by the packet length for every packet transmitted from the queue.

Traffic Shaping tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Traffic Shaping tab.

Port rate

This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by the traffic-shaping.

Queue ID

The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.

Queue rate

This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by the traffic-shaping

This value can be setup in 64kps steps up to the port cpacity (10, 100, Mbps or 1 Gbps).


486 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.14 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information

ETH Packets tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Statistics... -> ETH Packets tab.

ETH PACKETS

A list of interface entries.

Unicast Packets Rx

The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Unicast Packets Tx

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Broadcast Packets Rx

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 487

Broadcast Packets Tx

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Multicast Packets Rx

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.

Multicast Packets Tx

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.

FCS Errors

A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.

Frames too long

A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.

STP tab


488 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Statistics... -> STP tab.

STP BPDU Rx

The STP BPDUs received on a specific port.

STP BPDU Tx

The STP BPDUs sent from a specific port.

RSTP BPDU Rx

The RSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.

RSTP BPDU Tx

The RSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.

MSTP BPDU Rx

The MSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.

MSTP BPDU Tx

The MSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 489

37.15 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG...

Lag ID

This value corresponds with the Lag interface in the ifTable

Name

The associated name of the LAG used during creation

Link Trap

Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down

1 : checked

2 : unchecked

Administrative mode

Administratively enables or disables this LAG

Type

Lag Type

1: static

2: dynamic

LAG ID Ports

Port speed


490 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

LAG port speed

Port

Lag port index

Status

Lag port status

1: active

2: inactive


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 491

37.16 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> Add... push button.

Name



492 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.17 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push button.

Name


Link Trap

Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down

1 : checked

2 : unchecked

Administrative mode

Administratively enables or disables this LAG

Type

Lag Type


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 493

37.18 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> LAG Statistics push button.

Unicast Packets Rx

The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Unicast Packets Tx

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Broadcast Packets Rx

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.

Broadcast Packets Tx

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Multicast Packets Rx

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.


494 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Multicast Packets Tx

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.

FCS Errors

A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets

in length but do not pass the FCS check.

Frames too long

A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.

Errors Occurred RX

The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them form being delivered

Ethernet statistics Index

The value of this item uniquely identifies this entry.

Dropped Events

The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.

Octets

The total number of octets of data received on the network.

Packets

The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.

Broadcast Packets

The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.

Multicast Packets

The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

CRC Align Errors

The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Undersize Packets

The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise well formed.

Oversize Packets

The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise well formed.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 495

37.19 IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups...

Group

This specifies the Rx Water Mark Port Group number

Ports Rx Water Port Group string

Flow Control

Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.

1: Asymmetrical Rx

2: Asymmetrical Tx

3: Symmetrical

4: Disabled

Note:

Fast Ethernet ports do not support asymmetrical modes.


496 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Drop

This specifies the Rx Water Mark Drop value.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 497

37.20 IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Queue Config... push button.

Group

This specifies the Port Group number

Queue

This specifies TX Water Mark Queue number

Water Mark

This specifies Tx Water Mark Value for the Port Group queue.


498 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.21 IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info

Current tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> Current tab.

FILTER

Severity

The alarm severity selection

Trap

Selection of Trap

Set Filter

Filter selection


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 499

TRAP

The traps sent since last viewed.

Time

System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap occurred.


Severity

The severity associated

Trap Object Severity Threshold

broadcastStormStartTrap

Port Minor The broadcastStormStart trap is issued when the number of broadcast packets received in a second from a port is higher than the broadcast threshold (via sysConfigBroadcastThreshold).

broadcastStormEndTrap

Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)

The broadcastStormStop trap is issued when the number of broadcast packets received in a second from a port is lower than the broadcast threshold (i.e. signals that a BroadcastStormStart don’t exist anymore).

linkDown Port Major The linkDown trap is issued when the sending protocol entity recognizes a failure in one of the communication links represented in the agent's configuration.

linkUp Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)

The linkUp trap is issued when the sending protocol entity recognizes that one of the communication links represented in the agent's configuration has come up (i.e. signals that a linkDown don’t exist anymore).

RemoteFault Port Minor The RemotFault trap is issued when the attached remote device signals to the local end a fault condition.

NoRemoteFault Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)

The NoRemotFault trap is issued when the attached remote device signals to the local end a removed fault condition.

MismatchAutoNegotiation

Port Minor The MismatchAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the remote device does not support the required operation parameters.


500 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

NoMismatchAutoNegotiation


The NoMismatchAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the remote device supports the required operation parameters (i.e. signals that a MismatchAutoNegotiation does not exist anymore).

NoCompleteAutoNegotiation

Port Major The NoCompleteAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the Auto Negotiation process was not completed within 10s.

CompleteAutoNegotiation


The CompleteAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the AutoNegotiation process was completed within 10s.

NoValidCDB Card Major The NoValidCDB trap is issued when the CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB) file is not valid (corrupted, wrong format, etc.)

ValidCDB Card Cleared (Not Alarmed)

The ValidCDB trap is issued when the CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB) file is valid.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 501

History tab

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> History tab.

LOG

Time

System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap occurred.


Description

Description of the trap sent


502 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.22 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration.

This table contains information about every aggregate that is associated with the System

Aggregator ID

The aggregate ID associated with the System

MAC Address

A read only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator

System Priority

A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID

System ID

Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this aggregator

Aggregator config

A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate (TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)

Administrator key

The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator

Operational Key

The current operational value of the key for the aggregator


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 503

Partner System ID

A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local system

Partner System Priority

A read only value that indicates the priority value associated with the Partner System ID. If the aggregation is manually configured this system priority value will be a value assigned by the local system

Partner Operational Key

The current operational value of the key for the aggregator’s current protocol partner

Collector Max Delay

This value defines the maximum delay, in terms of microsecond, that may be imposed by the frame collector between receiving a frame from an aggregate Parser , and either delivering the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame


504 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.23 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push button.

Aggregator ID


Port Name



System ID Priority


System ID


Administrator key


Port Key

The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 505

Administrative Partner priority

A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the partner’s System ID

Operational Partner Priority

A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s System ID

Administrative Partner System ID

A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner System ID

Partner System ID


Administrative Partner Key

The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner

Operational partner key

The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner

Selected Aggregator ID

The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available for it to select

Attached Aggregator ID

The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator

Port number

The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port

Port priority

The priority value assigned to this aggregation port.

Administrative Port Number

The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner

Operational Port number

The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s protocol partner

Port priority

Value of the port priority for the protocol partner


506 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Operational Port priority

The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner

Port Administrative state

A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state

Port operational State

A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state

Port partner administrative State

A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner

Port Partner Operational State

A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner

Port Aggregator config



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 507

37.24 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push button.

Aggregator ID


Port Name



System ID Priority


System ID


Administrator key


Port Key

The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535


508 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Administrative Partner priority

A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the partner’s System ID

Operational Partner Priority

A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s System ID

Administrative Partner System ID

A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner System ID

Partner System ID


Administrative Partner Key

The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner

Operational partner key

The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner

Selected Aggregator ID

The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available for it to select

Attached Aggregator ID

The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator

Port number

The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port

Port priority

The priority value assigned to this aggregation port

Administrative Port Number

The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner

Operational Port number

The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s protocol partner

Port priority

Value of the port priority for the protocol partner


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 509

Operational Port priority

The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner

Port Administrative state

A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state

Port operational State

A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state

Port partner administrative State

A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner

Port Partner Operational State

A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner

Port Aggregator config



510 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.25 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Statistics...

Interface

Port name

LACPDU Rx

The number of valid LACPDUs received on this aggregation port

Marker PDU Rx

The number of valid Marker PDUs received on this aggregation port

Marker Response PDU

The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this aggregation port


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 511

Unknown Rx

The number of frames received that either carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type

Illegal Rx

The number of frames received that carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol subtype

LACPDU Tx

The number of valid LACPDUs transmitted on this aggregation port

Marker PDU Tx

The number of Marker PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port

Marker Response PDU

The number of Marker Response PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port


512 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.26 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Debug...

Filter

Interface

Port name

Port Name

An unique value for each interface

Rx State

The receive state machine for the Aggregation Port

1. Current


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 513

2. Expired

3. Defaulted

4. Initialize

5. LACP Disabled

6. Port Disabled

Last Rx Time

The value of time when the last LACPDU was received by this Aggregation Port

It is displayed in days, hours, minutes and second

Mux State

The value of the MUX state machine for the Aggregation Port

1. Detached

2. Waiting

3. Attached

4. Collecting

5. Distributing

6. Collecting-distributing

Mux reason

A human-readable text string indicating the reason for the most recent change of MUX state machine

Churn State

The state of the Actor Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of "noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_ACTOR_CHURN or the ACTOR_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the ACTOR_CHURN state

Partner Churn State

The state of the Partner Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of "noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_PARTNER_CHURN or the PARTNER_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the PARTNER_CHURN state

Churn Count

Count of the number of times the Actors Churn state machine has entered the ACTOR_CHURN state

Partner Churn Count

Count of the number of times the Partner Churn state machine has entered the PARTNER_CHURN state

Sync Transition Count

Count of the number of times the Actor’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC state


514 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Partner Sync Transition Count

Count of the number of times the Partner’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC state

Change Count

Count of the number of times the Actor’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port has changed

Partner Change Count

Count of the number of times the Partner’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port has changed


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 515

37.27 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Configuration...

VLAN ID


VLAN Type

The VLAN-type referring to this VLAN.

1. Other

2. Permanent

3. Dynamic GVRP


516 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.28 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Add push-button...

VLAN ID [1..4096]


Port Name


Participation

Chooses the participation for this VLAN


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 517

1. Auto

2. Included

3. Excluded

Tagging

Chooses the Tag for this VLAN

1. Tagged

2. Untagged


518 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.29 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.

VLAN ID [1..4096]


Port Name



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 519

Participation

1. Auto

2. Included

3. Excluded

Tagging

1. Tagged

2. Untagged


520 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.30 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-button.

VLAN ID

The VLAN-ID or other identifier referring to this VLAN.

Port Name


Participation

Chooses the participation for this VLAN

1. Auto

2. Included

3. Excluded

Tagging

Chooses the Tag for this VLAN

1. Tagged

2. Untagged


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 521

37.31 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> VLAN Statistics...

A table containing per-port, per-VLAN statistics for traffic received.

VLAN ID


Frames Tx

The number of valid frames transmitted by this port to its segment from the local forwarding process for this VLAN.

Discarted Frames Rx

The number of valid frames received by this port from its segment which were classified as belonging to this VLAN which were discarded due to VLAN related reasons.


522 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.32 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> Ethernet Statistics...

FILTER

Interface

Shows all Local Ports, Logical Ports and LAGs Available.

A list of Ethernet statistics entries.

Ethernet statistics Index

The value of this object uniquely identifies this etherStats entry.

Interface

This object identifies the source of the data that this etherStats entry is configured to analyze. String with the ethernet interface on this device.

Dropped Events



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 523

Octets


Packets


Broadcast Packets


Multicast Packets


CRC Align Errors


Undersize Packets


Oversize Packets


Fragments

The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Jabbers

The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).


524 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.33 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an item in the table) -> Details push-button..

Dropped Events


Octets


Packets


Broadcast Packets


Multicast Packets



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 525

CRC Align Errors


Undersize Packets


Oversize


Fragments

The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Jabbers

The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).


526 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.34 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Control...

History Control Index

An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.

Interface

This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.

This source can be any ethernet interface on this device.

Buckets Requested [1..65535]

The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.

Buckets Granted

The number of discrete sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.

Interval [1..3600 s]

The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.

Range: 1..3600


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 527

Status

The status of this historyControl entry.

1: Valid

2: Under Creation


528 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.35 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Add push-button..


An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.

Interface


Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.

Buckets Requested [1..65535]

The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.

Interval [1..3600 s]


Range: 1..3600


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 529

37.36 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Ethernet Statistics...

FILTER

Interface



Shows all History Control Indexes Available.

This Index uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.

Interval (s) [1..3600 s]

Shows Time Intervals for Filtration.


Range [1..3600 (1 hour)]


The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by the same value of historyControlIndex.


530 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Interface



Sample Index

An index that uniquely identifies the particular sample this entry represents among all samples associated with the same historyControlEntry.

Time of Started Interval

The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.

Dropped Events

The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources during this sampling interval.

Octets

The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets

The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.

Broadcast Packets

The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the broadcast address.

Multicast Packets

The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a multicast address.

CRC Align Errors

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame

Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Undersize Packets

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Oversize Packets

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.

Fragments

The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 531

Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Jabbers

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Collisions

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this sampling interval.


532 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

37.37 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-button...


The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by the same value of historyControlIndex.

Time of Started Interval

The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.

Dropped Events

The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources during this sampling interval.

Octets

The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 533

Packets

The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.

Broadcast Packets

The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the broadcast address.

Multicast Packets

The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a multicast address.

CRC Align Errors

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Undersize Packets

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Oversize Packets

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.

Fragments

The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Jabbers

The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Collisions

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this sampling interval.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 535

38 RPR

38.1 RPR Switch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration...

L2 Switch tab:

Supervision


RPR Node ID [0..63]

Enter the RPR node ID.

Protection Wait to Restore Time [1s..300s]

Enter the Wait to Restore Time.

Protection Hold Off Time [0..2000 x 10ms]


536 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.

Permanent MACs tab:

Filter


In the table, you can add a new, or delete an existing list entry.

Learned MACs tab:

Life Time Value [Disabled, 2..1440 min]

Enter the life time value or disable the life time restriction.

Filter


Select CUG ID [0..4095]

Select the CUG ID, or request the learned MAC entries.

The table shows the permanent MACs. You can copy to permanent MAC or delete an existing list entry.

Topology tab:

Filter


Ring Not Closed

Informs you about the ring configuration.

The table shows the learned MACs.

Card Release tab:

Card Release Switch

Values: Cleared, Forced Switch, Lockout.

Card Release State

Shows the current card state.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 537

How to Configure RPR Protection

Copy to Permanent MACs


538 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

38.2 RPR Ring Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR 3 o’clock or 9 o’clock -> Performance -> RPR Ring...


Current tab:









A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 539


Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.


Current


Display Meaning




Stream Frames Rx Number of received stream frames.

Best Effort Frames Rx Number of received best effort frames.

Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Throughput Stream Frames Rx [byte]

Throughput of received stream frames.

Throughput Best Effort Frames Rx [byte]

Throughput of received best effort frames.

Average Throughput Stream Rx [bytes/s]

Average number of received bytes per second..

Average Throughput Best Effort Rx [bytes/s]


Layer Threshold

VC4 30% (2400 BBE/s)

STM-4 RS-Layer 50% (4000 BBE/s)

STM-4 MS-Layer 30% (9600 BBE/s or 2400 BBE/s for each channel)





540 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


Previous 24 h tab:




Note:


How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 541

38.3 RPR Feeder Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> LP #n -> Performance -> RPR Feeder...


Current tab:






542 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619





Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.


Current


Display Meaning




Broadcast Frames Rx Number of received broadcast frames.

Broadcast Frames Tx Number of transmitted broadcast frames.

Multicast Frames Rx Number of received multicast frames.

Multicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted multicast frames.

Unicast Frames Rx Number of received unicast frames.

Unicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted unicast frames.

Lost Frames Ingress Stream Queue Overflow Rx

Number of receiving overflow conditions.

Lost Frames Egress Stream Queue Overflow Tx

Number of transmitting overflow conditions.

Lost Frames Ingress Best Effort Queue Overflow Rx

Number of receiving overflow conditions.

Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Total Throughput Rx [bytes] Total number of received bytes.

Total Throughput Tx [bytes] Total number of transmitted bytes.

Average Throughput Rx [bytes/s]



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 543

Average Throughput Tx [byte/s] Average number of transmitted bytes per second.





Previous 24 h tab:




Note:



544 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

38.4 Adding a Permanent Entry

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... tab: Permanent MACs -> Add...

CUG ID [0..4095]

Allows to select the CUG ID.

Port ID [1..4]

Allows to select the Port ID.

Node ID [0..63]

Allows to select the Node ID.

MAC Address

Allows to enter the unique MAC address.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 545

39 Security

39.1 Access Information


The window shows the actual access right.

You:

The NSAP of the element manager, which currently owns the "write access".

Nobody:

If the element manager which currently owns the "write access" is connected via F interface, "F-interface" is shown.


546 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

39.2 NMS NE Password

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password...

The NE stores 3 individual passwords for the operating systems:

OS, LCT and NCT.

Each system can change its assigned password, i.e. OS can change only the OS password in the NE, LCT can only change LCT password and NCT can only change the NCT password in the NE. In addition, every operating system can reset the other passwords inside the NE to the default password.

For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD

As usual, when changing the current password, the operator must enter the current password and type the new password twice.

Password build rule:

The password must have 8 ASCII printable characters at minimum and 15 at maximum.

Independently if it is successful or not, each attempt to connect and to change a password will be written into the Activity Log. This Activity Log can be requested by the operator.

Note:

When changing the OS (NMS) password via the LCT, the operator has to update the new password manually in the DCN properties of the Network Element Controller (NEC).

If this is not done, any new initialization of NEC will fail.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 547

39.3 Change Password to Default

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password... -> Default...

Before setting a password to default, the current NMS NE password must be entered.

The available setting options depend on the NE control mode (LCT, NCT or OS).

For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 549

40 Software

40.1 Software Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management...

This window displays information about the active APS and the inactive APS and offers software download functions.

Active APS:

Order Number

Identifies a delivered NE software version.

SW/FW Code

Identifies a delivered NE software version.

APS Record...

Opens the Active APS Record window.

Active APS Compatibility...

Opens the APS Compatibility Information window.


550 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Inactive APS:

Load State

Load State Description

Not loaded No valid inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE, and the software storage medium is not prepared for software download

Being loaded Software download in progress

Loaded A complete inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE

Being initialized The software storage medium is being prepared for software download

Initialized The software storage medium is prepared for software download

Order Number

Displays the order number of the inactive APS.

SW/FW Code

Displays the SW/FW code of the inactive APS.

Download... / Delta Download...

Opens a MS Windows standard File Open dialog for APS file selection.

Clicking Open opens the Software Download window.

If the download was successful and the load state is initialized, click Swap APS to set the inactive APS to active

Swap APS

With the Swap APS button, a shutdown is automatically executed and a NE startup is induced, using the previous inactive APS. If errors occur during a very early phase of the startup, the NE startup is interrupted and a second reset is performed to revert the previous APS.

After a successful swap, the previous APS becomes the inactive APS and vice versa.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 551

40.2 Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -> Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the software download process.




552 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

40.3 Delta Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> Delta Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -> Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the delta software download process.




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 553

40.4 Active APS Record

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> APS Record...

This window displays details of the active APS record.


554 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

40.5 APS Compatibility Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> Active APS Compatibility...

This window displays the contents of the HW/SW compatibility of the active APS (Application Program System) object in a tree structure.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 555

41 Fault Clearance

41.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the NE, Subrack and Microshelf can occur:

Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply"

Second Power Supply failed.

1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed"

Internal LAN failed.

1. Check LAN connections and configuration.



Alarm name: "Loss of Communication Between NE and Management System"

Q-interface link interrupted.

1. Check connection with Q connector


556 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

2. If the alarm persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm Name "Telemetry Interface n"

see TIF Fault Clearance







A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 557

41.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

• IFO155M

• IFQ622M

• IFS2G5

• IFS2G5B

• IFQ2G5

• IFQ2G5B

• IFS10G

• IFS10GB

• IFS10G-M

• IFS10G-R

• IFS10G-WLS

• IFQGBE

• IFQBEB

• IFOFE

• IFS40G-MX

• IFSOA

• IFSOA-PDC

• IFSOB

• IFSOB-PDC


The following equipment alarms related to an optical interface card can occur:


558 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the card.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<



Alarm name: "T0"

1. To clock failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.


Alarm name: "T0X"

1. T0X clock set failure.




Alarm name: "T0Y"

1. T0Y clock set failure.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 559




Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n

Backplane signal failed.




Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"

Card unavailable.





Alarm name: "Port Absent"

The port module is missing.

1. Insert a port module of correct type.


Alarm name: "Port Mismatch"

The used port module type does not match the card interface.

1. Replace the port module by the correct type.






560 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619



TIF Fault Clearance


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 561

41.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance


• IF2M

• IF345M

• IFO155M-E

• IFQGBE-E

• IFQGBEB-E

• IFOFE-E

• IFOFES-E

• IFOFGE-E


The following equipment alarms related to an electrical interface card can occur:

Alarm name: "Major"





562 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619



Alarm name: "T0"

Internal NE system clock failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct timing configuration.

2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n




3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service..


Card failed.





Alarm name: "LSU n Missing" (only with IF2M cards)

Line Switching Unit missing.

1. Check the dedicated LSU.

2. Extract the IF2M card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the LSU / IF2M card.


Alarm name: "Protection Shelf Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 563

Protection Shelf failed.

1. Check the connections and the configuration.



Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply" (only with IFO155M-E)

Second Power Supply failed.

1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.



Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)

Internal LAN failed.

1. Check LAN connections and configuration.



Alarm name: "PLC" (only with IFOFES-E)

Partial Loss of Capacity.

1. Check the configuration, what´s the minimum capacity (Mbit/s) of an LCAS group. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set at 7, then the alarm rises, when 2 VC12 have failed. This alarm occurs for Rx (PLCR), if received VCs are failed, and Tx (PLCT), if the sent VCs are not present at the partner side. Even a wrong (too high adjusted) PLC threshold has to be considered.

2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.



Alarm name: "TLC" (only with IFOFES-E)

Total Loss of Capacity

1. Check if all VCs of an LCAS group are failed. This alarm occurs also for Rx (TLCR) and Tx (TLCT).

2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.




564 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Alarm name: "FELNE" (only with IFOFES-E)

FarEndLCAS not enabled. One side is configured with LCAS, and the other not (only VC groups).

1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way, especially that in both sides LCAS is configured.



Alarm name: "FOPR" (only with IFOFES-E)

Failure of Protocol. The LCAS protocol has CRC errors.

1. Check if there is a degraded SDH link.



Alarm name: "MND" (only with IFOFES-E)

Member Not Detectable. Several VCs of the LCAS group are not detectable or the delay between each other is too great.

1. Check if all members of the LCAS-group have not more than 45 ms differential delay.



Alarm name:"SQM" (only with IFOFES-E)

Sequence mismatch. The number of the VCs inside of the LCAS group is inconsistent.

1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way.




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 565






TIF Fault Clearance


566 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

41.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance


• PF2G5

• SF2G5

• SF10G

• SF160G


The following equipment alarms related to a switch fabric card can occur:

Alarm name: "Major"







A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 567

Alarm name: "T0"

1. To clock failure.




Alarm name: "T0X"

1. T0X clock set failure.




Alarm name: "T0Y"

1. T0Y clock set failure.



4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.n

Alarm name: "Failuer of ISTM Xn" or "Failure of ISTM Yn"





Alarm name: "Failure of Internal Traffic Signal n"

Failure of Internal Traffic Signal.





Card unavailable.


568 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619









TIF Fault Clearance


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 569

41.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance


The following equipment alarms related to the SCOH and CLU cards can occur:

Alarm name: "EOW Unavailable"

EOW failed.





Alarm name: "Fan Failure"

Both fan units missing or at least two fans failed.

1. Replace the fan unit immediately.



570 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Alarm names: "Fan Unit 1 Failure", "Fan Unit 2 Failure"

One fan failed or at low speed.

1. Replace the fan unit soon.


Alarm name: "Flash SW"

Flash SW failed.

For more information, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

1. In case of a single Flash SW alarm, configure "Set to Idle" and "Set to Active".

2. If the alarm still persists, replace the defective MMC.


Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the SCOH card.




Alarm name: "T0"

T0 clock failure.




Alarm name: "T0X"

T0X clock set failure.




Alarm name: "T0Y"

T0Y clock set failure.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 571



Alarm name: "ULED Fail"

LED supply voltage (generated by SCOH for all cards) failed.

1. Replace the SCOH card.



SCOH card unavailable.








NE and Subrack Fault Clearance



572 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

41.6 TIF Fault Clearance


The following equipment alarms related to the TIF interface can occur:

As a basic principle, TIF alarms relate to faults that are not in the home NE.








A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 573

41.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance


The red fault LED indicates at least one fan is at low speed or failed.

Alarm name: "Fan Failure"

At least one fan is at low speed or failed.

1. Replace the fan unit according to the alarm types: "Fan Failure" and "Fan Unit 1/2 Failure", see SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance





TIF Fault Clearance


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 575

42 How to... (General Tasks)

42.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.

2. n the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration

3. In the Stack Parameters Config window, Layer 3 (NSAP) field, you can change the address settings, see MCF Stack Parameters Configuration.

Note:

The NSAP settings have critical influence on the entire network configuration and must not be changed without prior agreement of the network administrator.


576 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

42.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol where you want to change the NE equipment. A submenu appears, displaying all possible card types of this slot.

3. Click the required card type and configure the ports, if applicable. The card symbol of the selected card type is added to the Module View.

4. For further configurations, right-click the card symbol, and on the submenu, click Configuration.

How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports

SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 577

42.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

Configuring a traffic card:


2. In the Module View, right-click a slot number symbol.

3. Select a card from the context menu.

4. Select the Provisioning Modes, separately for each port if applicable.

5. Click Apply. The card will be added to the required equipping.

6. You can change the Provisioning Modes later on via the context menu of the card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

7. For further configurations, use the context menus of the card symbol and of the associated symbol(s) in the port list (appearing when the card symbol is clicked).

Removing a traffic card from the required equipping:


2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol.

3. Select Empty or Empty-Auto (or another card type) from the context menu.


578 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

42.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click a PDH or SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

2. A Port Provisioning Config window opens. (An equivalent Card Equipment Config window opens automatically when a slot is newly equipped with a SDH interface card.)

3. Select Empty for every unused port.

4. Select Working or one of the offered protection schemes for every used port.

5. In protection case, the involved partner slots are displayed. Be sure that they are equipped with the same card type and configured properly.

6. Click Apply.

How to Configure the Subrack Equipping


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 579

42.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object


2. In the Module View, click the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card.

3. In the port list, select a port symbol -> right-click Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)

4. In the Copy Data window, Copy Items area, set the checkbox(es) of the configuration(s) you want to copy, or click All Items to copy all configurations shown in the list.

5. In the Copy Units area, the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.

6. In the Targets field, the slot numbers of the possible targets are displayed.

7. Select the target(s) to where you want to copy the configuration settings. To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.

8. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards selected in the Targets field.

Note:

Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object


580 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

42.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

1. In the Module View, right-click a suitable card symbol -> Copy Card Data...

2. In the Copy Card Data window , the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.

3. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.

4. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.

5. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards selected in the Targets field.

Note:

Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 581

42.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging

Configuring ETH cards:

1. Set the dedicated MUX structure (only IFOFES-E): Select the card -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview -> VC4 -> Configuration -> Mux Preparation.

2. Set the concatenation (only IFOFES-E): Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

3. Select a template (not with IFOFES-E): You should think before, which VC´s (capacity) are being used and then set a template, cause a belated modification is only possible with traffic interruption of all ports. Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation... Note: Adjacent VC4-4v can be changed over, via "Modify Template", to VC4-2v.. VC4-6v. The total sum must be always 8 VC4.

4. Setting of Bandwidth and Subchanneling: Select the card -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

5. Switching the VC´s: E.g. for a VC12-5v, 3 VC12 are switched via one SDH card/port and the other 2 VC12 via another SDH card/port. Therefore, not a VC12-5v must be selected, but the particular VC12´s in the cross connection window.

6. Concerning LCAS: For all involved VC´s, LCAS must be activated.

ETH traffic is not running:

1. Is the ETH link o.k.? Check the ETH Configuration window.

2. Check the "Signal Label" and the "TTI" with the VC4 Configuration window. When virtual concatenation is configured, check all single VCs (if o.k. the SDH connection is sure).

3. Both partners must have the same subchanneling entries (on or off). See GFP Assignment window.

4. If subchanneling is configured, check that channel ID is identical with both partners.

5. Are VCAT groups at both partners configured the same way (both with LCAS activated or not; no mixed way)?

6. With the Ethernet Packet Performance window, you can see, wether port traffic is coming/going (Rx/Tx). If all is dropped at Tx, then probably the subchanneling or the subchannel ID is wrong configured (Sink and Source port is not the same).


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 583

43 How to... (Timing)

43.1 How to Configure the Timing

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...

T0:

2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window , right-click the T0 symbol -> Configuration...

3. Select the Requested Timing Source for T0: T1 (STM signals), T3 (external clock input), Auto Selection (depending of the quality of the available clock pulses) or Free Running (in case no clock input is available).

- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections. - Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.

4. Click Apply. Click Close.

T1:

5. If a T1 timing source is used, right-click the T1 symbol -> Configuration... In the T1 Config window, Timing References tab, select the card(s) and port(s) used as timing references.


T3:

7. If a T3 timing source is used, right-click the T3 symbol -> Configuration... In the T3/T4 Config window, select the T3 mode and SSM settings (quality information about the used clock pulse, transmitted in the MSOH of the STM-n signal)


9. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, SA-Bit selection field next to the T3 symbol, select the SA bit(s) to be used with T3.

10. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T0 Prio column, right-click the yellow field next to each used T1 or T3 timing source and define a priority relating to the T0 system clock selection.

11. You can lock out each T1 and T3 timing source (so that it is generally not available as a synchronization reference) by clicking the green hook next to the T0 Prio field. A red cross will appear indicating the lockout state of this timing source. To reset the lockout state, click the red cross.

T4:

12. Right-click the T4 symbol -> Configuration...

13. In the T3/T4 Config window, select the Requested Timing Source for T4, the T4 Mode, and the Minimum Quality Threshold for T4.



584 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

15. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T4 Prio column, right-click the yellow field next to each used T1 timing source, and define a priority relating to the T4 clock output selection.

16. In the SA-Bit selection field next to the T4 symbol, select the SA bit to be used with T4.

17. In the left-hand bottom part of the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, you can enable the Use of SSM for Selection and you can select the Wait to Restore (WTR) Time.



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 585

43.2 How to Set Sync Priorities

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...)

2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 Prio or T4 Prio field of the concerned T1 or T3 clock, select the priority (1 = highest) or "do not use". If the selected priority number is not unique within T0 Prio or T4 Prio, the system will change the other priorities automatically.

3. Click Apply.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 587

44 How to... (Alarms)

44.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Option Settings button.

2. In the Option Settings window, select the Alarm Severity Threshold to be displayed. No alarms with lower priority will be displayed.

3. If the Alarm Flash checkbox in the General field is disabled, an alarm is indicated by highlighting the concerned symbol(s) permanently red, instead of flashing red.

4. Click OK.


588 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

44.2 How to Suppress Alarms

Suppressing Equipment or SEC Alarms

1. In the Module View, right-click the relevant symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms... or SEC Alarms... (In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or flashing red.).

2. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s). Raised alarms are displayed at the top of the list.

3. Click Apply.

Suppressing Communication Alarms

1. In the Module View, click the relevant card symbol. (In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or flashing red.).

2. In the traffic view, right-click the card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-n or En-> Fault -> Communication Alarms...

3. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).

4. Click Apply.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 589

44.3 How to Configure TIF Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...

2. In the NE - TIF #n Config window, enter an individual name and select the Closed or Open input polarity for each used TIF port.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 591

45 How to... (Cross Connections)

45.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting cross connection filter options:

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, Filter area, use the selection fields to select the filtering features.

3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross connections depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all cross connection filter settings:


2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings change to All.


592 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

45.2 How to Create a Cross Connection


2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the CC Type, VC Level and Concatenation Counter N value (if applicable).

TP A:

4. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.

5. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.

TP B:

6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.

7. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.

8. If no TP B’ termination point is required, proceed with step #12.

TP B’:

9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross connection end point. (The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)

10. Click the button "To TPB' >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.

11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected. In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.

13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 593

45.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection


.


3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 VC Level.

4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).





9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.


11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.



594 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619



.













A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 595



.













596 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

45.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection

1. Before a VC12 cross connection on the ETH card could be done, the multiplex structure on the ETH card must be changed to VC12.


.


4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the connection type.

5. Select the VC12/VC3 connection layer.

6. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

7. Select an Ethernet card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.

8. The SDH and Ethernet card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (->Close).

9. Select the applicable TP indexes. Attention: On the TP, which relates to the ETH card, the LCT offers always all possible TP indexes of the VC level (i.e. 3x VC3 and 63x VC12).



12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List (depending on the filter settings).



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 597

45.7 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR


.

2. You can identify the TP allocation (tributary or ring side) via the GFP Assignment window (-> Close).


4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC Level.

5. In the TP Selection area, select an Ethernet Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.


7. In the TP Selection area, select the PF2G5 card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.






598 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

45.8 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

1. Only in case of using a microshelf: Make sure that a LNQ622 and a Switch Fabric card are additionally installed in subrack 1.

2. In the tool bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

.


4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 LC Layer.

5. The SDH and PDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).



8. In the TP Selection area, select the LNQ622M card or an IF2M / IF345M card respectively, and select the VC number you want as cross connection end point.



11. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 599

45.9 How to Add and Remove Path Protections

Adding a path protection:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select an unprotected cross connection. Click Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list. Click Modify...

4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type field, select the equivalent protected cross connection type.

5. In the TP Selection field, select the Card and the VC number you want as protection end point.

6. Click Add Protection.

Removing a path protection:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection. Click Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list. Click Modify...

4. Click Remove Work. Path or Remove Prot Path.

5. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted. The selected cross connection remains connected, but becomes unprotected.


600 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

45.10 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button


3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.

4. Select the VC Level.

5. Line West: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area. Click the button "To TPA >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.

6. Line East: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area. Click the button "To TPB >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.



9. Select the Unidirectional Tail End CC Type.

10. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 5. Click the button "To TPB >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.

11. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 6. Click the button "To TPB' >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.

12. Tributary: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area. Click the button "To TPA >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 601

45.11 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection




4. Select the VC Level.

5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point


7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point




11. Repeat the steps 5 to 10 depending on the required number of branches, with the same card A and TP a settings.



602 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

45.12 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection


2. In the Cross Connections List window, find one branch of the existing broadcast cross connection in the list.

3. Click Add...


5. Select the same VC Level as the existing branches have.

6. Select the same card A and TP A as the existing branches have. Click To TP A >>. Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. Select card B and TP B in the TP Selection field. Click To TP B >>. Select the TP Index, if applicable.



10. You can display a graphic of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic..

11. You can display a graphic of the TP relations of a selected cross connection by clicking Details... (select the list entry) -> Graphic Details ...


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 603

45.13 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection


2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the branch of the broadcast cross connection.

3. Click Delete.

4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection". It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.


604 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

45.14 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection


2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection to be disconnected.

3. Click Disconnect.

4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection". It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be disconnected after having disconnected the last lower order cross connection.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 605

45.15 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections


2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...

3. In the MCF - DCC Config window, DCC List, right-click the DCC channel you want to configure.

4. On the submenu, click Configuration... to open the DCC Linkage Configuration window.

5. In this window, make the relevant settings.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 607

46 How to... (OH Cross Connections)

46.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting OH cross connection filter options:


2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...

3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, in the Filter field of either tab, use the selection fields to select the filtering features.

4. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross connections depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all OH cross connection filter settings:



3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings change to All.


608 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

46.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection



3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH TP List tab, OH Termination Point list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection start point.

4. Click Set as TP A. The selected OH cross connection start point appears in the New OH Cross Connection area as TP A entry.

5. In the list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection end point.

6. Click Set as TP B. The selected OH Cross Connection end point appears in the New OH Cross Connection area as TP B entry. The corresponding OH CC Type is displayed.

7. Click Connect.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 609

46.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection



2. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH CC List tab, select the OH cross connection you want to disconnect. The selected OH cross connection is displayed in detail in the OH CC Options area.

3. Click Disconnect.

4. Confirm the acknowledgement window.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 611

47 How to... (Protections)

47.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection

Creating a 1+1 MSP Protection:


2. In the Module View, right-click the protecting SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... Select Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) for the port(s) of the card. If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured automatically. Click Apply.

3. To create the protection, right-click the card symbol. On the submenu, click Protection.

4. In the Protection Management window , select the respective 1+1 MSP in the list, and click Create. The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).

5. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...

6. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration.

7. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select Activated and click Apply. The 1+1 MSP protection is active.

Deleting a 1+1 MSP Protection:


2. In the Module View, click one of the card symbols involved in the 1+1 MSP protection.

3. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...

4. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration...

5. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select De-activated and click Apply. Confirm the warning message.

6. In the top segment of the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...

7. In the Protection Management window , select the 1+1 MSP to be deleted and click Delete.

8. To remove the protection completely, click theinvolved protecting card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.

9. Click Apply.


612 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

47.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 2F Shared Ring Protection (example IF2G5 card):


2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, card in one of the involved slots and select the 2F Shared Ring provisioning mode. If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured automatically.

3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...

4. In the Protection Management list, select the 2F-SPRING and click Create. The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).

5. To activate the 2F Shared Ring Protection: In the port list, right-click the port symbol with Provisioning Mode "2F Shared Ring..." -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...

6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.

7. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, select "Activated" in the MSP Activation field.

8. Click Apply.

Deleting a 2F Shared Ring Protection:


2. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".

3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...

4. In the Protection Management window , select the 2F-SPRING to be deleted and click Delete.

5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.

6. Click Apply.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 613

47.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 4F Shared Ring Protection:


2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5 type, IFQ2G5 type or IFS10G type card in one of the involved slots and select the 4F Shared Ring Protection provisioning mode. If the 3 partner slots have been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, they will be configured automatically..

3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...

4. In the Protection Management list, select the 4F-SPRING and click Create. The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).

5. To activate the 4F Shared Ring Protection: In the port list, right-click the card symbol with ProvMode "4F Shared Ring ..." -> Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration.

6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.

7. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, MSP Activation field, select "Activated".

8. Click Apply.

Deleting a 4F Shared Ring Protection:


2. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".

3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...

4. In the Protection Management window , select the 4F-SPRING to be deleted and click Delete.

5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.

6. Click Apply.


614 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

47.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings


2. In the Module View, click a 2.5-Gbit/s or 10-Gbit/s interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING protection.

3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING -> Configuration... -> Squelch...

4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, Squelch Table area, you can assign the required Node Ids to each AU4.

5. Click Apply.




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 615

47.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

Creating an IF2M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click the slot number symbol that offers IF2M card protection, and select the IF2M (CP) card.

2. Configure the required number of IF2M cards in the working card slots.

3. Right-click each IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.

4. Right-click the IF2M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.

Deleting an IF2M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove any working IF2M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.

2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF2M (CP) card -> Card Protection -> Remove Group. Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.

Note: Avoiding IF2M Traffic loss during exchange of an IF2M card in the card protection scheme

Before plugging a "new/replaced" card into a working slot of an existing IF2M card protection scheme, this card needs to get "deactivated". This means the operator needs to remove this card from the required equipping. By this the card will be switched off. A switched-off card will not perform an optimistic startup, so this card cannot destroy traffic in a protection group. A deactivation can be done by one of the following methods:

a) If the card has to be transferred and was already plugged into an NE, the current slot shall be set to "empty" while the card is plugged. By this action the card gets switched off (i.e. deactivated).

b) If the card was not plugged into an NE before (coming from the spare), it shall be put into the respective working slot, it needs to get plugged into another free slot first, which is configured to "empty" (not "auto-empty" !!). Also by this the card gets switched off (i.e. deactivated).

If this is still not acceptable, then the only advise is, that the card shall not be put into the respective working slot. Instead of this it shall be plugged in the protection slot and have it started-up here. By this no traffic hits will occur because an optimistic startup in the protection slot will not cause any traffic hits.

If you have to do this, please make sure that there are no faults on the Protection group!


616 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 617

47.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection

Creating an IF345M card protection:

5. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click a slot number symbol that offers IF345M card protection, and select the IF345M (CP) card.

6. Configure the required IF345M card in the working card slot.

7. Right-click the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.

8. Right-click the IF345M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.

Deleting an IF345M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove the working IF345M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.

2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF345M (CP) card -> Card Protection -> Remove Group. Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.

3.



618 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

47.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection

Creating an SF2G5 card protection:


2. In the Module View, configure an SF2G5 working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.

3. Configure an SF2G5 protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.

No further configurations are necessary.

Creating an SF10G card protection:


2. In the Module View, configure an SF10G working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.

3. Configure an SF10G protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.


Creating an SF160G card protection:


2. In the Module View, configure an SF160G working card in a suitable slot (105 in the double-row subrack, 307 in the single-row subrack)

3. Configure an SF160G (CP) protecting card in a suitable slot (107 in the double-row subrack, 308 in the single-row subrack)


Deleting an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G card protection:


2. In the Module View, change the protecting slot configuration to Empty or to a working card.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 619

47.8 How to Configure RPR Protection


2. In the Module View, click the PF2G5 card symbol.

3. In the port list, click the PF2G5 symbol -> Subview...

4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window: Right-click the RPR Switch symbol -> Configuration...

5. In the RPR Switch Config window, L2 Switch folder, enter the RPR Node ID.

6. Enter the Protection Wait to Restore Time.

7. Enter the Protection Hold Off Time. The Hold Off Time makes sure that the L2 protection is not triggered by a MSP, SNCP, or RPR ring protection switching of other nodes.

8. Click Apply.


620 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

47.9 How to Create an SNCP Protection

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.


3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type: Bidirectional Protected or Unidirectional Head End or Unidirectional Tail End.

4. Select the VC Level (e.g. VC4).

TP A:



TP B:



TP B’:

9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross connection end point. (The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)

10. Click the button "To TPB' >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.



13. Configure the second end point in the same way, starting from step #3.

14. Configure all intermediate points in the same way, starting from step #3.

15. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List (depending on the Filter settings).



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 621

47.10 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path

Preparing the multiplex structure for the protecting LO path:


2. In the Module View, right-click the LO SF card symbol where the multiplex structure is to be prepared -> Subview...

3. In the Selection window, right-click the VC4 (Mux) symbol to be structured -> Subview...

4. In the Mux Structure window, right-click the VC4 symbol -> Configuration...

5. To use VC12 containers, select the Mux Config window, VC4 Mux Preparation tab, activate the "21 x TU-12" selection box of the related TUG #n. To use VC3 containers, no VC4 preparation is necessary on the LO sub-networks.

6. Click the Apply button.

7. If LO concatenation is to be used: In the context menus of the LO SF, select Configuration -> Concatenation... and create the required concatenated containers.

Creating the LO cross connection (protecting path):

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be modified -> Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection and click Modify...

4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type area, select Bidirectional Protected.

5. In the TP Selection area, select the TP A to be protected. Click the button "To TPA >>"

6. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card (e.g. SF2G5). Select the LO container from the VC4 that has been structured before.

7. Click the button "To TPB' >>"

Creating the HO VC4 cross connection (protecting path):


2. In the Add Cross Connection window, CC Type, select Bidirectional Protected.

3. Select the VC Level VC4.

4. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card and VC4 container that have been selected in the previous steps. Click the button "To TPA >>"


622 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

5. In the TP Selection area, select the SDH card and VC4 container to be used for the protecting path. Click the button "To TPB >>"



8. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List (depending on the Filter settings).



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 623

47.11 How to Set Up the Squelching Table


2. In the Module View, click an interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection or 4F-SPRING protection.

3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...

4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Traffic Flow window, right-click the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING symbol -> Configuration...

5. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, click Squelch...

6. In the Squelch Config window, assign the AU4 containers to their related NEs.

The following illustrations give an example:


624 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 625

47.12 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link

1. Make sure that the internal LAN connection between the SURPASS hiT7070 SC or DC subrack and the extension shelf is connected.

2. Make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.

3. In the Module View, insert an LNQ622M card. In the Card Equipment Config window, configure a port.

4. Right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Extension Shelf... Configure a microshelf with a suitable subrack ID according to the table in the ITMN..

5. After the LNQ622M card is started up successfully, click the LNQ622M card symbol.

6. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...

7. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol -> Configuration...

8. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding ESM card of the microshelf. Click Apply.

9. In the upper part of the Module View, configure the second LNQ622M card.

10. In the Card Equipment Config window, active the Protection Port.

11. In the Port Provisioning window of the Protection card, select the entry Link Protection with the number according to the actual configuration.

12. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...

13. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol -> Configuration...

14. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding ESM protection card of the microshelf. Click Apply.

15. In the upper part of the Module View, right-click one of the LNQ622M cards symbols -> Protection...

16. Select the entry in the list. Click Create.

17. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... Now the protection group is available.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 627

48 How to... (Concatenations)

48.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations


2. In the Module View, click the SDH interface card symbol.

3. In the port list, right-click the card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

4. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Add... button.

5. In the Add Concatenation Group window, select the Concatenation Type, Group ID and TPs, as applicable.

6. Click Apply.


628 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

48.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations


2. In the Module View, right-click the ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

3. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Template... button.

4. In the Concatenation Group Templates window, select one of the templates.

5. Click Apply.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 629

49 How to... (GFP Configurations)

49.1 How to Create / Delete VC Channels

Creating VC channels:


2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the VC/VC Group for the GFP Group.

4. Click Apply.

Deleting VC channels:


2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the GFP Group.

4. Set the VC/VC Group to Unassigned.

5. Click Apply Confirm the warning message.

Note:

Never delete a VC group as long as still a GFP group is assigned!


630 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

49.2 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups


2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol.-> Configuration -> Concatenation...

3. In the Concatenation Config window, click Template... and select one of the Concatenation Group Templates. Click Apply.

4. Close the Concatenation Config window.

5. In the context menu of the card, select Configuration -> GFP Assignment....

6. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment or LP Bandwidth Configuration area (as applicable), enter the bandwidth for each GFP Group.

7. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message.

8. In the GFP-SDH Assignment area, select the VC/VC Group assignment for each GFP group.

9. Click Apply.

10. Connect the SDH capacity with a path through the network.

11. Upload a VCDB for the NE.

Note:

To decommission ports, unassign them from the GFP group or disconnect a cross connection. If you unassign the GFP-SDH assignment, the device will be reset resulting in a short payload interruption of all channels served by the card.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 631

49.3 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel


2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

3. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment area, enter the bandwidth value for the concerned Ethernet port.

4. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message.

Note:

Check the sum of the bandwidths of all the Ethernet ports assigned to a GFP group. The sum must be less than the SDH capacity you plan to assign to the GFP group. Exceeding the SDH capacity may cause packet loss!


632 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

49.4 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

Creating a CUG:


2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).

4. Click Port Config.

5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.

6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.

7. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

8. Click CUG Management.

9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Add CUG to open the PF2G5 Add CUG window.

10. In this window, make the relevant settings.

Modifying a CUG:









9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, change the CUG settings.

10. Click Apply.

Deleting a CUG:


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 633



3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable)..






9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Remove CUG.


634 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

49.5 How to Specify the CUG Service Class




4. Click Port Config...

5. In the Config window, select the CUG Mode and click Apply. Confirm the warning message.

6. Click the CUG Management button. (for configuration details, see Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards

7. In the CUG Management Config window, Service Class field, select Static Best Effort for fair access to the available bandwidth or Dynamic Prio 0 to Dynamic Prio 7: The service class of an incoming packet can be determined dynamically based upon the VLAN tag of the packet.

8. Click Apply.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 635

49.6 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic


2. In the Module View, click a PF2G5 card symbol.

3. In the port list, right-click the PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview....

4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window, right-click the RPR 3 o’clock or RPR 9 o’clock symbol -> Performance -> RPR Ring. The RPR Ring Performance window opens.


636 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

49.7 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths


2. In the Module View, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

3. In the GFP Assignment window, LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable), enter the Ingress Bandwidth and / or Egress Bandwidth for each involved LP port.

4. Click Apply.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 637

50 How to... (Data and Software Handling)

50.1 How to Download VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...

2. Set NE State to Idle.

3. In the Config DB Action field, select Set to Default Config DB.

4. Click Download... A standard Open dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.

5. Select the path and the file you want to download.

6. Click Open. The VCDB Download window appears.

7. Click Start to start the download. The state of the download process is displayed. After the download process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB download is successfully completed.

8. If the download is not concluded successfully and an error message occurs, click Close to close the window. Check the reason for the error (e. g. open the Module View and check the window to verify which setting is missing). After removing the error, repeat the download process.

9. After successful download, the NE can be set to active. As a precondition for this, the NE name must not be the default name. If necessary, change the NE name via the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...

10. In the Config DB Management window, select NE Stare Active and click Apply. The NE will be initialized automatically.


638 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

50.2 How to Upload VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...

2. In the Config DB Management window, click Upload... A standard File Save As dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.

3. Select the path and enter the file you want to upload.

4. Click Save. The VCDB Upload window appears.

5. Click Start to start the upload. The state of the download process is displayed. After the upload process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB upload is successfully completed..

Note:

During VCDB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if configured to Empty before.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 639

51 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules)

51.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

The MMC must be exchanged in case of an Flash SW alarm at the SCOH card, see SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance The replacement of a defect MMC by a new one (with no data), must be done with an operating SCOH. The current NE-VCDB is being copied automatically to the new MMC. The password data, license and subrack label are not automatically transformed to the MMC. To adopt these data to the new MMC, they must be inserted via the LCT again. If an SCOH is replaced, the old MMC (placed at the front panel of the SCOH) must be adopted before the new SCOH is inserted. The MMC data belongs always to the subrack! Passwords, license and subrack label are set to default after an SCOH reboot. Also the NE-VCDB is being lost after a Power Off (pulling out the SCOH).

Note:

The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that battery.

For detailed flow charts, see:

How to Change a Defective SCOH

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC


640 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

51.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH

For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.

Note:



A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 641


642 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB

Flow Chart Symbol Legend




A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 643

51.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC


If you replace a defective SCOH inclusive a defective MMC, you must follow the below flow chart.

Note:



644 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 645

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB





646 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

51.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH


If you replace a defective MMC on a working SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 647


648 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619





A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 649

51.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB


650 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

51.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 651

52 Index

1

1 1 MSP Configuration......................... 157

1 N MSP Alarms..................................... 80

1 N MSP Configuration ........................ 159

1 N MSP Extension.............................. 162

1 N MSP Protected Traffic Flow............. 99

1 N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow ...... 100

2

2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration......................................................... 175

2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration......................................................... 173

2F SPRING Configuration.................... 167

2F-SPRING Extra Configuration .......... 169

4

4F SPRING Configuration.................... 171

4F SPRING Traffic Flow ...................... 117

A

Abbreviations ........................................... 1

About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software ..... 11

Access Information .............................. 459

Active APS Record .............................. 467

Actual Equipping Information ................. 32

Add 1 N MSP ....................................... 161

Add Concatenation Group ................... 206

Add Cross Connection ......................... 145

Add Extension Link Protection ............. 189

Add VLAN ID Assignment.................... 223

Add Working Ports ............................... 163

Adding a Permanent Entry................... 458

Adding a Reachable DCC Address...... 269

Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address 276

Alarm List ............................................... 65

APS Compatibility Information ............. 468

ASIC Data Information ......................... 324

Assigned VLAN IDs Information........... 222

AU4 PJE Performance ......................... 337

AU4/VC4 Configuration........................ 127

B

Booster Cards Label Information ........... 41

C

Card Configuration for ETH Cards ......... 52

Card Configuration for SDH Cards......... 50

Card Equipment Configuration............... 43

Card Inventory Summary ....................... 33

Change Password to Default ............... 461

CLU Card Configuration......................... 45

Communication Alarm Feature Table .... 73

Communication Alarms .......................... 71

Concatenated VC4 Configuration ........ 199

Concatenation Configuration................ 203

Concatenation Details .......................... 205

Concatenation Group Templates ......... 207

Copy Card Data.................................... 327

Copy Data ............................................ 325

Copy to Permanent MACs ................... 333

Cross Connection Details..................... 147

Cross Connection Graphic Details ....... 149

Cross Connections Graphic ................. 148

Cross Connections List ........................ 141

D

Date / Time Configuration ...................... 13

DB Download Dialog ............................ 329


652 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

DB Management Configuration............ 328

DB Upload Dialog................................. 330

Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections..................................... 271

Delta Software Download .................... 466

E

E12 Configuration ................................ 135

E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ........................... 93

E3 Configuration .................................. 137

E3/VC3 Alarms....................................... 78

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance......................................................... 473

EOW Configurations .............................. 24

Equipment Alarms.................................. 69

ESM-CORE Card Configuration ............ 30

ETH Configuration ............................... 133

ETH Traffic Flow .................................... 92

Ethernet Packet Performance.............. 335

Extension Link Protection Configuration......................................................... 188

Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow. 187

Extension Shelf Configuration................ 29

F

Fan Unit Fault Clearance ..................... 481

Flow Chart Symbol Legend.................. 556

G

GFP Assignment .......................... 219; 235

GFP Frames Performance................... 369

GFP Group Subview ............................ 234

GFP Group Traffic Flow ....................... 233

H

How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ............................ 510

How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path .............................. 528

How to Add and Remove Path Protections......................................................... 507

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups......................................................... 536

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH ................................ 552

How to Change a Defective SCOH...... 546

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC .............. 549

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards......................................................... 485

How to Configure DCC Cross Connections......................................................... 513

How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging........................................ 489

How to Configure ETH Concatenations534

How to Configure NSAP Settings......... 483

How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports 486

How to Configure RPR Bandwidths ..... 542

How to Configure RPR Protection........ 526

How to Configure SDH Concatenations......................................................... 533

How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings ...................................... 522

How to Configure the Subrack Equipping......................................................... 484

How to Configure the Timing................ 491

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling .......................................... 495

How to Configure TIF Ports.................. 497

How to Copy Alarm Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object............................................... 487

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object ............................... 488

How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection......................................... 519

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection......................................... 520

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection......................................... 521


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 653

How to Create / Delete an 1+1 MSP Line Protections....................................... 519

How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection......................................... 523

How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection......................................... 524

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 SF10G or SF160G Card Protection ............. 525

How to Create / Delete VC Channels .. 535

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG538

How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection....................................... 509

How to Create a Cross Connection ..... 500

How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary Ethernet Port to an RPR.. 505

How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection....................................... 508

How to Create an OH Cross Connection......................................................... 516

How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection ............................ 504

How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection....................................... 506

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection....................................... 501



How to Create an SNCP Protection..... 527

How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection....................................... 511

How to Disconnect a Cross Connection......................................................... 512

How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection....................................... 517

How to Download VCDB Files ............. 543

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic .......................... 541

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH .............................................. 545

How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options.................................... 499

How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options.................................... 515

How to Set Sync Priorities.................... 493

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel............................................ 537

How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link......................................................... 532

How to Set Up the Squelching Table ... 530

How to Specify the CUG Service Class540

How to Suppress Alarms...................... 496

How to Upload VCDB Files .................. 544

I

IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration......... 49

IF2M Card Label Information ................. 39

IF2M Port Configuration ....................... 122

IFO155M Card Label Information........... 35

IFO155ME Card Label Information ........ 37

IFS40G-MX Card Configuration ............. 51

IFS40G-MX Card Label Information....... 40

IFSO* Cards Configuration .................... 54

IP Addresses Configuration ................. 285

IP Addresses Entry Modify................... 287

IP Static Routing Configuration ............ 288

IP Static Routing Entry Add.................. 290

IP Static Routing Entry Modify ............. 291

ISTM 4 Configuration ........................... 190

L

LCAS State Configuration .................... 243

LCAS VC12-nv Configuration .............. 246

LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection 248

LCAS VC3-nv Configuration ................ 245

LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection.... 247

LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration ........ 251


654 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration .......... 249

Log Records Attribute .......................... 332

M

MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information......................................................... 261

MCF CLNS Performance ..................... 263

MCF DCC Configuration ...................... 265

MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ........ 266

MCF DCC Linkage Performance ......... 268

MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration .. 273

MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ... 275

MCF IP over OSI Configuration ........... 279

MCF OSI over IP Adding a Reachable Address............................................ 283

MCF OSI over IP Modifying a Reachable Address............................................ 284

MCF OSI over IP Configuration ........... 280

MCF OSI over IP Performance ............ 282

MCF Stack Parameters Configuration . 256

MCF Transport Connection Information......................................................... 258

MCF Transport Connection Performance......................................................... 259

Message Communication Functions.... 255

Mixed Mode GFP Assignment ............. 219

Modify Cross Connection..................... 150

Modify LCAS Concatenation Group..... 244

Modify Template................................... 208

Modifying a Reachable DCC Address . 270

Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address......................................................... 278

Module View Double-row Subrack........ 16

Module View Single-row Subrack ......... 19

MSTTP Far End Performance ............. 345

MSTTP Near End Performance ........... 342

N

NE and Subrack Fault Clearance......... 469

NE Logs Information ............................ 331

NEAP Configuration ............................... 68

Neighbour Ports ..................................... 25

Network Element Configuration ............. 14

NewTopic 1 .......................................... 489

NewTopic 2 ............................................ 97

NMS NE Password............................... 460

O

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance 470

Option Settings....................................... 22

OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration . 299

OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add....... 301

OSPF Area Metric Configuration.......... 298

OSPF Areas Configuration................... 295

OSPF Areas Entry Modify .................... 297

OSPF Configuration ............................. 293

OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ..... 318

OSPF External LSDB Information........ 317

OSPF Interface Metric Configuration ... 306

OSPF Interfaces Configuration ............ 302

OSPF Interfaces Entry Add.................. 304

OSPF LSDB Entry Details.................... 316

OSPF LSDB Information ...................... 315

OSPF Neighbours Information ............. 310

OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration . 307

OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add....... 309

OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details314

OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information.. 312

Overhead Cross Connections .............. 151

P

PDH Cards Label Information ................ 36


A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 655

PF2G5 Add CUG ................................. 241

PF2G5 GFP Assignment ..................... 237

PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration ................................... 239

PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration ................................... 240

PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration ................................... 238

Plain Cross Connections List ............... 143

Port Configuration ................................ 121

Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards.... 122

Port Provisioning Configuration ............. 55

Possible Equipping Information ............. 31

Protection Management....................... 153

R

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB................... 555

RPR Feeder Performance ................... 455

RPR Ring Performance ....................... 453

RPR Switch Configuration ................... 451

RSTTP Near End Performance ........... 348

S

SCOH NE and Subrack Fault Clearance......................................................... 478

SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance 478

SCOH Card Configuration ..................... 44

SCOH Card Label Information ............... 38

Script Configuration ............................... 26

SDH GFP Assignment ......................... 242

SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information......................................... 35

SF160G Card Configuration .................. 46

SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration.... 47

SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack....................................... 48

Software Download.............................. 465

Software Management ......................... 463

STM-1 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ................ 107

STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow............... 103

STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ...... 101

STM-1 Traffic Flow................................. 85

STM-16 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow .............. 109

STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow.................................................. 105

STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow112

STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection................... 88

STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING......................................................... 177

STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING Extra................................................. 178


STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2F-SPRING ........................................... 176

STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow.................................................. 111

STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ...................................... 113

STM-16 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow .... 113

STM-16 Traffic Flow............................... 89

STM-4 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ................ 108

STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow............... 104

STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection..................... 86

STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ...... 102

STM-4 Traffic Flow................................. 87

STM-64 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow .............. 110

STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow.................................................. 106

STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow115

STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection................... 90



656 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619

STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING Extra ................................................ 182


STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2F-SPRING ........................................... 180

STM-64 Gauge Performance............... 339

STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ................................................. 114

STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ...................................... 116

STM-64 Traffic Flow............................... 91

STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration ........... 155

STM-N Configuration ........................... 124

Subrack Data ....................................... 323

SURPASS hiT 7070 Features................ 10

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance .... 476

Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration ..................................... 57

T

T0 Configuration..................................... 60

T1 Configuration..................................... 61

T3 / T4 Config ........................................ 62

TCA List ................................................. 83

TCP Connections Entry Details ........... 321

TCP Connections Information.............. 319

TIF Configuration ................................... 82

TIF Fault Clearance ............................. 480

U

Using this Help System............................ 9

V

VC12 Far End Performance................. 366

VC12 Near End Performance .............. 363

VC12-2v Configuration......................... 201

VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection .......... 193

VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP.............. 129

VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP.............. 131

VC3-2v Configuration........................... 202

VC4 Configuration .................................. 94

VC4 Multiplex Structure ....................... 139

VC4 Selection......................................... 96

VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards......................................................... 119

VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow ........... 97

VCCTP Far End Performance.............. 354

VCCTP Near End Performance ........... 351

VCTTP Far End Performance .............. 360

VCTTP Near End Performance............ 357

Virtual 16x VC4 Selection .................... 197

Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .............. 225

Virtual 2x VC3 Selection ...................... 194


Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection ............ 198


Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration............. 230

Virtual VC12 Configuration................... 226

Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration............. 228

VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment .......... 217

VLAN C Traffic Flow..................... 214; 217

VLAN Functionality............................... 211

VLAN Selection .................................... 216

W

Working STM-1 Selection .................... 164

Working VC4 Selection ........................ 165

Documents

Guimn_e-surpass Hit 7070 3.2